Table of Contents
- Preface
- Chapter 1 Using the CLI
- Chapter 2 User Interface
- Chapter 3 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands
- Chapter 4 MAC-based VLAN Commands
- Chapter 5 Protocol-based VLAN Commands
- Chapter 6 VLAN-VPN Commands
- Chapter 7 L2PT Commands
- Chapter 8 GVRP Commands
- Chapter 9 Voice VLAN Commands
- Chapter 10 Etherchannel Commands
- Chapter 11 User Management Commands
- 11.1 user name (password)
- 11.2 user name (secret)
- 11.3 service password-recovery
- 11.4 user access-control ip-based
- 11.5 user access-control mac-based
- 11.6 user access-control port-based
- 11.7 line
- 11.8 password
- 11.9 login
- 11.10 login local
- 11.11 media-type rj45
- 11.12 telnet
- 11.13 serial_port baud-rate
- 11.14 show password-recovery
- 11.15 show user account-list
- 11.16 show user configuration
- 11.17 show telnet-status
- Chapter 12 HTTP and HTTPS Commands
- 12.1 ip http server
- 12.2 ip http max-users
- 12.3 ip http session timeout
- 12.4 ip http secure-server
- 12.5 ip http secure-protocol
- 12.6 ip http secure-ciphersuite
- 12.7 ip http secure-max-users
- 12.8 ip http secure-session timeout
- 12.9 ip http secure-server download certificate
- 12.10 ip http secure-server download key
- 12.11 show ip http configuration
- 12.12 show ip http secure-server
- Chapter 13 Binding Table Commands
- 13.1 ip source binding
- 13.2 ip dhcp snooping
- 13.3 ip dhcp snooping vlan
- 13.4 ip dhcp snooping information option
- 13.5 ip dhcp snooping information strategy
- 13.6 ip dhcp snooping information remote-id
- 13.7 ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id
- 13.8 ip dhcp snooping trust
- 13.9 ip dhcp snooping mac-verify
- 13.10 ip dhcp snooping limit rate
- 13.11 ip dhcp snooping decline rate
- 13.12 show ip source binding
- 13.13 show ip dhcp snooping
- 13.14 show ip dhcp snooping interface
- 13.15 show ip dhcp snooping information interface
- Chapter 14 ARP Inspection Commands
- Chapter 15 DoS Defend Commands
- Chapter 16 IEEE 802.1X Commands
- 16.1 dot1x system-auth-control
- 16.2 dot1x handshake
- 16.3 dot1x auth-method
- 16.4 dot1x accounting
- 16.5 dot1x guest-vlan(global)
- 16.6 dot1x quiet-period
- 16.7 dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout
- 16.8 dot1x max-reauth-req
- 16.9 dot1x
- 16.10 dot1x guest-vlan(interface)
- 16.11 dot1x port-control
- 16.12 dot1x port-method
- 16.13 show dot1x global
- 16.14 show dot1x interface
- Chapter 17 PPPoE ID-Insertion Commands
- Chapter 18 System Log Commands
- 18.1 logging buffer
- 18.2 logging buffer level
- 18.3 logging file flash
- 18.4 logging file flash frequency
- 18.5 logging file flash level
- 18.6 logging host index
- 18.7 logging console
- 18.8 logging console level
- 18.9 logging monitor
- 18.10 logging monitor level
- 18.11 clear logging
- 18.12 show logging local-config
- 18.13 show logging loghost
- 18.14 show logging buffer
- 18.15 show logging flash
- Chapter 19 SSH Commands
- Chapter 20 MAC Address Commands
- 20.1 mac address-table static
- 20.2 mac address-table aging-time
- 20.3 mac address-table filtering
- 20.4 mac address-table notification
- 20.5 mac address-table max-mac-count
- 20.6 mac address-table notification (interface)
- 20.7 mac address-table security
- 20.8 show mac address-table
- 20.9 clear mac address-table
- 20.10 show mac address-table aging-time
- 20.11 show mac address-table max-mac-count
- 20.12 show mac address-table interface
- 20.13 show mac address-table count
- 20.14 show mac address-table address
- 20.15 show mac address-table vlan
- 20.16 show mac address-table notification
- 20.17 show mac address-table security
- Chapter 21 System Configuration Commands
- 21.1 system-time manual
- 21.2 system-time ntp
- 21.3 system-time dst predefined
- 21.4 system-time dst date
- 21.5 system-time dst recurring
- 21.6 hostname
- 21.7 location
- 21.8 contact-info
- 21.9 ip address
- 21.10 ip address-alloc
- 21.11 reset
- 21.12 reboot
- 21.13 reboot-schedule
- 21.14 copy running-config startup-config
- 21.15 copy startup-config tftp
- 21.16 copy tftp startup-config
- 21.17 boot application
- 21.18 remove backup-image
- 21.19 firmware upgrade
- 21.20 boot autoinstall start
- 21.21 boot autoinstall persistent-mode
- 21.22 boot autoinstall auto-save
- 21.23 boot autoinstall auto-reboot
- 21.24 boot autoinstall retry-count
- 21.25 show boot autoinstall
- 21.26 show boot autoinstall downloaded-config
- 21.27 ping
- 21.28 tracert
- 21.29 show system-info
- 21.30 show system-info interface
- 21.31 show image-info
- 21.32 show boot
- 21.33 show running-config
- 21.34 show startup-config
- 21.35 show system-time
- 21.36 show system-time dst
- 21.37 show system-time ntp
- 21.38 show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet
- 21.39 show cable-diagnostics careful interface
- 21.40 show cpu-utilization
- 21.41 show memory-utilization
- Chapter 22 IPv6 Address Configuration Commands
- Chapter 23 Ethernet Configuration Commands
- 23.1 interface gigabitEthernet
- 23.2 interface range gigabitEthernet
- 23.3 description
- 23.4 shutdown
- 23.5 flow-control
- 23.6 duplex
- 23.7 jumbo
- 23.8 jumbo-size
- 23.9 speed
- 23.10 storm-control
- 23.11 bandwidth
- 23.12 clear counters
- 23.13 show interface status
- 23.14 show interface counters
- 23.15 show interface configuration
- 23.16 show storm-control
- 23.17 show bandwidth
- Chapter 24 QoS Commands
- Chapter 25 Port Mirror Commands
- Chapter 26 Port Isolation Commands
- Chapter 27 Loopback Detection Commands
- Chapter 28 DDM Commands
- Chapter 29 ACL Commands
- 29.1 time-range
- 29.2 absolute
- 29.3 periodic
- 29.4 holiday
- 29.5 holiday(global)
- 29.6 access-list create
- 29.7 mac access-list
- 29.8 access-list standard
- 29.9 access-list extended
- 29.10 rule
- 29.11 access-list policy name
- 29.12 access-list policy action
- 29.13 redirect interface
- 29.14 s-condition
- 29.15 s-mirror
- 29.16 qos-remark
- 29.17 access-list bind acl(interface)
- 29.18 access-list bind acl(vlan)
- 29.19 access-list bind(interface)
- 29.20 access-list bind(vlan)
- 29.21 show access-list
- 29.22 show access-list policy
- 29.23 show access-list bind
- Chapter 30 MSTP Commands
- 30.1 debug spanning-tree
- 30.2 spanning-tree(global)
- 30.3 spanning-tree(interface)
- 30.4 spanning-tree common-config
- 30.5 spanning-tree mode
- 30.6 spanning-tree mst configuration
- 30.7 instance
- 30.8 name
- 30.9 revision
- 30.10 spanning-tree mst instance
- 30.11 spanning-tree mst
- 30.12 spanning-tree priority
- 30.13 spanning-tree timer
- 30.14 spanning-tree hold-count
- 30.15 spanning-tree max-hops
- 30.16 spanning-tree bpdufilter
- 30.17 spanning-tree bpduguard
- 30.18 spanning-tree guard loop
- 30.19 spanning-tree guard root
- 30.20 spanning-tree guard tc
- 30.21 spanning-tree mcheck
- 30.22 show spanning-tree active
- 30.23 show spanning-tree bridge
- 30.24 show spanning-tree interface
- 30.25 show spanning-tree interface-security
- 30.26 show spanning-tree mst
- Chapter 31 DLDP Commands
- Chapter 32 IGMP Snooping Commands
- 32.1 ip igmp snooping(global)
- 32.2 ip igmp snooping(interface)
- 32.3 ip igmp snooping rtime
- 32.4 ip igmp snooping mtime
- 32.5 ip igmp snooping report-suppression
- 32.6 ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
- 32.7 ip igmp snooping drop-unknown
- 32.8 ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval
- 32.9 ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count
- 32.10 ip igmp snooping vlan-config
- 32.11 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (router-port-forbidden)
- 32.12 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config
- 32.13 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config (router-port-forbidden)
- 32.14 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config (source-ip-replace)
- 32.15 ip igmp snooping querier vlan
- 32.16 ip igmp snooping querier vlan (general query)
- 32.17 ip igmp snooping max-groups
- 32.18 ip igmp snooping authentication
- 32.19 ip igmp snooping accounting
- 32.20 ip igmp profile
- 32.21 deny
- 32.22 permit
- 32.23 range
- 32.24 ip igmp filter
- 32.25 clear ip igmp snooping statistics
- 32.26 show ip igmp snooping
- 32.27 show ip igmp snooping interface
- 32.28 show ip igmp snooping vlan
- 32.29 show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan
- 32.30 show ip igmp snooping groups
- 32.31 show ip igmp snooping querier
- 32.32 show ip igmp profile
- Chapter 33 MLD Snooping Commands
- 33.1 ipv6 mld snooping(global)
- 33.2 ipv6 mld snooping(interface)
- 33.3 ipv6 mld snooping rtime
- 33.4 ipv6 mld snooping mtime
- 33.5 ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression
- 33.6 ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
- 33.7 ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown
- 33.8 ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval
- 33.9 ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count
- 33.10 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
- 33.11 ip mld snooping vlan-config (router-port-forbidden)
- 33.12 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config
- 33.13 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config (router-port-forbidden)
- 33.14 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config (source-ip-replace)
- 33.15 ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan
- 33.16 ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan (general query)
- 33.17 ipv6 mld snooping max-groups
- 33.18 ipv6 mld profile
- 33.19 deny
- 33.20 permit
- 33.21 range
- 33.22 ipv6 mld filter
- 33.23 clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics
- 33.24 show ipv6 mld snooping
- 33.25 show ipv6 mld snooping interface
- 33.26 show ipv6 mld snooping vlan
- 33.27 show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan
- 33.28 show ipv6 mld snooping groups
- 33.29 show ipv6 mld snooping querier
- 33.30 show ipv6 mld profile
- Chapter 34 SNMP Commands
- 34.1 snmp-server
- 34.2 snmp-server view
- 34.3 snmp-server group
- 34.4 snmp-server user
- 34.5 snmp-server community
- 34.6 snmp-server host
- 34.7 snmp-server engineID
- 34.8 snmp-server traps snmp
- 34.9 snmp-server traps link-status
- 34.10 snmp-server traps
- 34.11 snmp-server traps power
- 34.12 snmp-server traps ddm
- 34.13 snmp-server traps vlan
- 34.14 rmon history
- 34.15 rmon event
- 34.16 rmon alarm
- 34.17 rmon statistics
- 34.18 show snmp-server
- 34.19 show snmp-server view
- 34.20 show snmp-server group
- 34.21 show snmp-server user
- 34.22 show snmp-server community
- 34.23 show snmp-server host
- 34.24 show snmp-server engineID
- 34.25 show rmon history
- 34.26 show rmon event
- 34.27 show rmon alarm
- 34.28 show rmon statistics
- Chapter 35 LLDP Commands
- 35.1 lldp
- 35.2 lldp hold-multiplier
- 35.3 lldp timer
- 35.4 lldp receive
- 35.5 lldp transmit
- 35.6 lldp snmp-trap
- 35.7 lldp tlv-select
- 35.8 lldp med-fast-count
- 35.9 lldp med-status
- 35.10 lldp med-tlv-select
- 35.11 lldp med-location
- 35.12 show lldp
- 35.13 show lldp interface
- 35.14 show lldp local-information interface
- 35.15 show lldp neighbor-information interface
- 35.16 show lldp traffic interface
- Chapter 36 AAA Commands
- 36.1 aaa enable
- 36.2 tacacas-server host
- 36.3 show tacacs-server
- 36.4 radius-server host
- 36.5 show radius-server
- 36.6 aaa group
- 36.7 server
- 36.8 show aaa group
- 36.9 aaa authentication login
- 36.10 aaa authentication enable
- 36.11 aaa authentication dot1x default
- 36.12 aaa accounting dot1x default
- 36.13 show aaa authentication
- 36.14 show aaa accounting
- 36.15 line console
- 36.16 login authentication(console)
- 36.17 enable authentication(console)
- 36.18 line telnet
- 36.19 login authentication(telnet)
- 36.20 line ssh
- 36.21 login authentication(ssh)
- 36.22 enable authentication(telnet)
- 36.23 enable authentication(ssh)
- 36.24 ip http login authentication
- 36.25 ip http enable authentication
- 36.26 show aaa global
- Chapter 37 DHCP Relay Commands
- Chapter 38 PoE Commands
- 38.1 power inline consumption (global)
- 38.2 power profile
- 38.3 power time-range
- 38.4 absolute
- 38.5 periodic
- 38.6 power holiday
- 38.7 holiday
- 38.8 power inline consumption (interface)
- 38.9 power inline priority
- 38.10 power inline supply
- 38.11 power inline profile
- 38.12 power inline time-range
- 38.13 show power inline
- 38.14 show power inline configuration interface
- 38.15 show power inline information interface
- 38.16 show power profile
- 38.17 show power holiday
- 38.18 show power time-range
TP-Link T2500G-10TS(TL-SG3210) User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for T2500G-10TS(TL-SG3210) by TP-Link which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.
CLI Reference Guide
T2500G-10MPS
1910012153 REV1.0.0
May 2017
COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS
Specifications are subject to change without notice. is a registered trademark of
TP-Link Technologies Co., Ltd. Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make
any derivative such as translation, transformation, or adaptation without permission from
TP-Link Technologies Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2017 TP-Link Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights
reserved.
http://www.tp-link.com
I
CONTENTS
Preface ............................................................................................................................ 1
Chapter 1 Using the CLI ................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Accessing the CLI ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.1.1 Logon by a console port ...................................................................................................... 4
1.1.2 Logon by Telnet ...................................................................................................................... 6
1.1.3 Logon by SSH ........................................................................................................................ 10
1.2 CLI Command Modes .................................................................................................................. 15
1.3 Privilege Restrictions ................................................................................................................... 18
1.4 Conventions ................................................................................................................................... 18
1.4.1 Format Conventions ........................................................................................................... 18
1.4.2 Special Characters .............................................................................................................. 19
1.4.3 Parameter Format ................................................................................................................ 19
Chapter 2 User Interface .............................................................................................. 20
2.1 enable ............................................................................................................................................... 20
2.2 service password-encryption .................................................................................................. 20
2.3 enable password ........................................................................................................................... 21
2.4 enable secret ................................................................................................................................. 22
2.5 configure .......................................................................................................................................... 23
2.6 exit...................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.7 end ..................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.8 history ............................................................................................................................................... 25
2.9 history clear .................................................................................................................................... 25
Chapter 3 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands ................................................................ 27
3.1 vlan ..................................................................................................................................................... 27
3.2 interface vlan .................................................................................................................................. 28
3.3 name .................................................................................................................................................. 28
3.4 switchport mode ........................................................................................................................... 29
3.5 switchport access vlan ............................................................................................................... 30
3.6 switchport trunk allowed vlan ................................................................................................... 30
3.7 switchport general allowed vlan .............................................................................................. 31
3.8 switchport pvid .............................................................................................................................. 32
3.9 show vlan summary...................................................................................................................... 33
3.10 show vlan brief ............................................................................................................................... 33
II
3.11 show vlan ......................................................................................................................................... 34
3.12 show interface switchport ......................................................................................................... 34
Chapter 4 MAC-based VLAN Commands ................................................................. 36
4.1 mac-vlan mac-address ............................................................................................................... 36
4.2 mac-vlan .......................................................................................................................................... 37
4.3 show mac-vlan ............................................................................................................................... 37
4.4 show mac-vlan interface ............................................................................................................ 38
Chapter 5 Protocol-based VLAN Commands ......................................................... 39
5.1 protocol-vlan template ............................................................................................................... 39
5.2 protocol-vlan vlan ......................................................................................................................... 40
5.3 protocol-vlan group ..................................................................................................................... 40
5.4 show protocol-vlan template .................................................................................................... 41
5.5 show protocol-vlan vlan ............................................................................................................. 42
Chapter 6 VLAN-VPN Commands .............................................................................. 43
6.1 dot1q-tunnel ................................................................................................................................... 43
6.2 dot1q-tunnel tpid .......................................................................................................................... 43
6.3 switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping .......................................................................................... 44
6.4 switchport dot1q-tunnel mode nni ......................................................................................... 45
6.5 show dot1q-tunnel ....................................................................................................................... 46
6.6 show dot1q-tunnel mapping ..................................................................................................... 46
6.7 show dot1q-tunnel interface .................................................................................................... 47
Chapter 7 L2PT Commands ......................................................................................... 48
7.1 l2protocol-tunnel .......................................................................................................................... 48
7.2 l2protocol-tunnel type ................................................................................................................ 48
7.3 show l2protocol-tunnel global ................................................................................................. 50
7.4 show l2protocol-tunnel interface ............................................................................................ 50
Chapter 8 GVRP Commands ........................................................................................ 52
8.1 gvrp .................................................................................................................................................... 52
8.2 gvrp (interface)............................................................................................................................... 52
8.3 gvrp registration ............................................................................................................................ 53
8.4 gvrp timer ........................................................................................................................................ 54
8.5 show gvrp interface ..................................................................................................................... 55
8.6 show gvrp global ........................................................................................................................... 56
Chapter 9 Voice VLAN Commands ............................................................................ 57
III
9.1 voice vlan ......................................................................................................................................... 57
9.2 voice vlan aging ............................................................................................................................. 57
9.3 voice vlan priority .......................................................................................................................... 58
9.4 voice vlan mac-address ............................................................................................................. 59
9.5 switchport voice vlan mode ...................................................................................................... 60
9.6 switchport voice vlan security ................................................................................................. 60
9.7 show voice vlan ............................................................................................................................. 61
9.8 show voice vlan oui ...................................................................................................................... 61
9.9 show voice vlan switchport ....................................................................................................... 62
Chapter 10 Etherchannel Commands ......................................................................... 63
10.1 channel-group ............................................................................................................................... 63
10.2 port-channel load-balance ........................................................................................................ 64
10.3 lacp system-priority ..................................................................................................................... 65
10.4 lacp port-priority ........................................................................................................................... 66
10.5 show etherchannel ....................................................................................................................... 66
10.6 show etherchannel load-balance ............................................................................................ 67
10.7 show lacp ......................................................................................................................................... 68
10.8 show lacp sys-id ............................................................................................................................ 68
Chapter 11 User Management Commands ................................................................ 70
11.1 user name (password) ................................................................................................................. 70
11.2 user name (secret) ........................................................................................................................ 71
11.3 service password-recovery ...................................................................................................... 72
11.4 user access-control ip-based .................................................................................................. 73
11.5 user access-control mac-based ............................................................................................. 74
11.6 user access-control port-based ............................................................................................. 75
11.7 line ...................................................................................................................................................... 76
11.8 password ......................................................................................................................................... 77
11.9 login ................................................................................................................................................... 78
11.10 login local ......................................................................................................................................... 78
11.11 media-type rj45 ............................................................................................................................. 79
11.12 telnet ................................................................................................................................................. 80
11.13 serial_port baud-rate ................................................................................................................... 80
11.14 show password-recovery .......................................................................................................... 81
11.15 show user account-list................................................................................................................ 82
11.16 show user configuration ............................................................................................................. 82
11.17 show telnet-status........................................................................................................................ 83
IV
Chapter 12 HTTP and HTTPS Commands .................................................................. 84
12.1 ip http server .................................................................................................................................. 84
12.2 ip http max-users .......................................................................................................................... 85
12.3 ip http session timeout ............................................................................................................... 86
12.4 ip http secure-server ................................................................................................................... 86
12.5 ip http secure-protocol............................................................................................................... 87
12.6 ip http secure-ciphersuite ......................................................................................................... 88
12.7 ip http secure-max-users .......................................................................................................... 88
12.8 ip http secure-session timeout ................................................................................................ 89
12.9 ip http secure-server download certificate ......................................................................... 90
12.10 ip http secure-server download key ...................................................................................... 91
12.11 show ip http configuration ......................................................................................................... 92
12.12 show ip http secure-server ....................................................................................................... 92
Chapter 13 Binding Table Commands ......................................................................... 93
13.1 ip source binding .......................................................................................................................... 93
13.2 ip dhcp snooping .......................................................................................................................... 94
13.3 ip dhcp snooping vlan ................................................................................................................. 95
13.4 ip dhcp snooping information option ..................................................................................... 96
13.5 ip dhcp snooping information strategy ................................................................................. 96
13.6 ip dhcp snooping information remote-id .............................................................................. 97
13.7 ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id ................................................................................ 98
13.8 ip dhcp snooping trust ................................................................................................................ 99
13.9 ip dhcp snooping mac-verify .................................................................................................... 99
13.10 ip dhcp snooping limit rate ..................................................................................................... 100
13.11 ip dhcp snooping decline rate ............................................................................................... 101
13.12 show ip source binding ............................................................................................................ 102
13.13 show ip dhcp snooping ............................................................................................................ 102
13.14 show ip dhcp snooping interface ......................................................................................... 103
13.15 show ip dhcp snooping information interface ................................................................. 103
Chapter 14 ARP Inspection Commands .................................................................... 105
14.1 ip arp inspection(global) .......................................................................................................... 105
14.2 ip arp inspection trust .............................................................................................................. 105
14.3 ip arp inspection(interface)..................................................................................................... 106
14.4 ip arp inspection limit-rate ...................................................................................................... 107
14.5 ip arp inspection recover ........................................................................................................ 108
14.6 show ip arp inspection ............................................................................................................. 108
V
14.7 show ip arp inspection interface .......................................................................................... 109
14.8 show ip arp inspection statistics .......................................................................................... 109
14.9 clear ip arp inspection statistics ........................................................................................... 110
Chapter 15 DoS Defend Commands .......................................................................... 111
15.1 ip dos-prevent ............................................................................................................................ 111
15.2 ip dos-prevent type................................................................................................................... 111
15.3 show ip dos-prevent ................................................................................................................. 113
Chapter 16 IEEE 802.1X Commands .......................................................................... 115
16.1 dot1x system-auth-control .................................................................................................... 115
16.2 dot1x handshake ....................................................................................................................... 116
16.3 dot1x auth-method ................................................................................................................... 116
16.4 dot1x accounting ....................................................................................................................... 117
16.5 dot1x guest-vlan(global) .......................................................................................................... 118
16.6 dot1x quiet-period..................................................................................................................... 118
16.7 dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout ....................................................................................... 119
16.8 dot1x max-reauth-req .............................................................................................................. 120
16.9 dot1x .............................................................................................................................................. 121
16.10 dot1x guest-vlan(interface) .................................................................................................... 121
16.11 dot1x port-control ..................................................................................................................... 122
16.12 dot1x port-method .................................................................................................................... 123
16.13 show dot1x global ..................................................................................................................... 124
16.14 show dot1x interface ................................................................................................................ 124
Chapter 17 PPPoE ID-Insertion Commands ............................................................ 126
17.1 pppoe id-insertion(global)....................................................................................................... 126
17.2 pppoe circuit-id(interface) ...................................................................................................... 127
17.3 pppoe circuit-id type ................................................................................................................ 127
17.4 pppoe remote-id ........................................................................................................................ 128
17.5 show pppoe id-insertion global ............................................................................................ 129
17.6 show pppoe id-insertion interface ....................................................................................... 129
Chapter 18 System Log Commands .......................................................................... 131
18.1 logging buffer .............................................................................................................................. 131
18.2 logging buffer level .................................................................................................................... 131
18.3 logging file flash ......................................................................................................................... 132
18.4 logging file flash frequency .................................................................................................... 133
18.5 logging file flash level ............................................................................................................... 134
VI
18.6 logging host index ..................................................................................................................... 134
18.7 logging console .......................................................................................................................... 135
18.8 logging console level ................................................................................................................ 136
18.9 logging monitor .......................................................................................................................... 137
18.10 logging monitor level ................................................................................................................ 137
18.11 clear logging ................................................................................................................................ 138
18.12 show logging local-config....................................................................................................... 139
18.13 show logging loghost ............................................................................................................... 139
18.14 show logging buffer .................................................................................................................. 140
18.15 show logging flash ..................................................................................................................... 140
Chapter 19 SSH Commands ......................................................................................... 142
19.1 ip ssh server ................................................................................................................................ 142
19.2 ip ssh version .............................................................................................................................. 142
19.3 ip ssh algorithm .......................................................................................................................... 143
19.4 ip ssh timeout .............................................................................................................................. 144
19.5 ip ssh max-client ........................................................................................................................ 144
19.6 ip ssh download .......................................................................................................................... 145
19.7 remove public-key ..................................................................................................................... 146
19.8 show ip ssh................................................................................................................................... 146
Chapter 20 MAC Address Commands ....................................................................... 148
20.1 mac address-table static ........................................................................................................ 148
20.2 mac address-table aging-time .............................................................................................. 149
20.3 mac address-table filtering .................................................................................................... 149
20.4 mac address-table notification ............................................................................................. 150
20.5 mac address-table max-mac-count ................................................................................... 151
20.6 mac address-table notification (interface) ........................................................................ 152
20.7 mac address-table security ................................................................................................... 153
20.8 show mac address-table ......................................................................................................... 154
20.9 clear mac address-table ......................................................................................................... 155
20.10 show mac address-table aging-time .................................................................................. 155
20.11 show mac address-table max-mac-count ........................................................................ 156
20.12 show mac address-table interface ...................................................................................... 156
20.13 show mac address-table count ............................................................................................ 157
20.14 show mac address-table address ....................................................................................... 158
20.15 show mac address-table vlan ................................................................................................ 158
20.16 show mac address-table notification ................................................................................. 159
VII
20.17 show mac address-table security ........................................................................................ 159
Chapter 21 System Configuration Commands ....................................................... 161
21.1 system-time manual ................................................................................................................. 161
21.2 system-time ntp ......................................................................................................................... 161
21.3 system-time dst predefined .................................................................................................. 163
21.4 system-time dst date ............................................................................................................... 164
21.5 system-time dst recurring ...................................................................................................... 165
21.6 hostname ...................................................................................................................................... 166
21.7 location .......................................................................................................................................... 167
21.8 contact-info ................................................................................................................................. 167
21.9 ip address ..................................................................................................................................... 168
21.10 ip address-alloc .......................................................................................................................... 169
21.11 reset ............................................................................................................................................... 170
21.12 reboot ............................................................................................................................................ 170
21.13 reboot-schedule ........................................................................................................................ 171
21.14 copy running-config startup-config .................................................................................... 172
21.15 copy startup-config tftp .......................................................................................................... 172
21.16 copy tftp startup-config .......................................................................................................... 173
21.17 boot application ......................................................................................................................... 174
21.18 remove backup-image ............................................................................................................. 174
21.19 firmware upgrade ....................................................................................................................... 175
21.20 boot autoinstall start ................................................................................................................. 176
21.21 boot autoinstall persistent-mode ........................................................................................ 176
21.22 boot autoinstall auto-save ...................................................................................................... 177
21.23 boot autoinstall auto-reboot .................................................................................................. 177
21.24 boot autoinstall retry-count ................................................................................................... 178
21.25 show boot autoinstall ............................................................................................................... 178
21.26 show boot autoinstall downloaded-config ....................................................................... 179
21.27 ping ................................................................................................................................................. 179
21.28 tracert ............................................................................................................................................ 180
21.29 show system-info ...................................................................................................................... 181
21.30 show system-info interface ................................................................................................... 182
21.31 show image-info ......................................................................................................................... 182
21.32 show boot ..................................................................................................................................... 183
21.33 show running-config ................................................................................................................. 183
21.34 show startup-config ................................................................................................................. 184
21.35 show system-time ..................................................................................................................... 184
VIII
21.36 show system-time dst .............................................................................................................. 185
21.37 show system-time ntp ............................................................................................................. 185
21.38 show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet ........................................................ 186
21.39 show cable-diagnostics careful interface ......................................................................... 186
21.40 show cpu-utilization .................................................................................................................. 187
21.41 show memory-utilization ......................................................................................................... 187
Chapter 22 IPv6 Address Configuration Commands ............................................ 189
22.1 ipv6 enable ................................................................................................................................... 189
22.2 ipv6 address autoconfig.......................................................................................................... 189
22.3 ipv6 address link-local ............................................................................................................. 190
22.4 ipv6 address dhcp ..................................................................................................................... 191
22.5 ipv6 address ra ........................................................................................................................... 191
22.6 ipv6 address eui-64 .................................................................................................................. 192
22.7 ipv6 address ................................................................................................................................ 193
22.8 show ipv6 interface ................................................................................................................... 194
Chapter 23 Ethernet Configuration Commands ..................................................... 195
23.1 interface gigabitEthernet ........................................................................................................ 195
23.2 interface range gigabitEthernet............................................................................................ 195
23.3 description ................................................................................................................................... 196
23.4 shutdown ...................................................................................................................................... 197
23.5 flow-control ................................................................................................................................. 198
23.6 duplex ............................................................................................................................................ 198
23.7 jumbo ............................................................................................................................................. 199
23.8 jumbo-size .................................................................................................................................... 199
23.9 speed ............................................................................................................................................. 200
23.10 storm-control .............................................................................................................................. 201
23.11 bandwidth ..................................................................................................................................... 202
23.12 clear counters ............................................................................................................................. 202
23.13 show interface status ............................................................................................................... 203
23.14 show interface counters ......................................................................................................... 204
23.15 show interface configuration ................................................................................................. 204
23.16 show storm-control .................................................................................................................. 205
23.17 show bandwidth ......................................................................................................................... 205
Chapter 24 QoS Commands ......................................................................................... 207
24.1 qos .................................................................................................................................................. 207
24.2 qos cos .......................................................................................................................................... 208
IX
24.3 qos dscp ....................................................................................................................................... 208
24.4 qos queue cos-map .................................................................................................................. 209
24.5 qos queue dscp-map ............................................................................................................... 210
24.6 qos queue mode ........................................................................................................................ 211
24.7 qos queue weight ...................................................................................................................... 212
24.8 show qos interface .................................................................................................................... 213
24.9 show qos cos-map .................................................................................................................... 214
24.10 show qos dscp-map ................................................................................................................. 214
24.11 show qos queue mode ............................................................................................................. 215
24.12 show qos status ......................................................................................................................... 215
Chapter 25 Port Mirror Commands ............................................................................ 217
25.1 monitor session destination interface................................................................................ 217
25.2 monitor session source interface ........................................................................................ 218
25.3 show monitor session .............................................................................................................. 219
Chapter 26 Port Isolation Commands ....................................................................... 220
26.1 port isolation................................................................................................................................ 220
26.2 show port isolation interface ................................................................................................. 221
Chapter 27 Loopback Detection Commands .......................................................... 222
27.1 loopback-detection(global) .................................................................................................... 222
27.2 loopback-detection interval ................................................................................................... 222
27.3 loopback-detection recovery-time ..................................................................................... 223
27.4 loopback-detection(interface) .............................................................................................. 224
27.5 loopback-detection config ..................................................................................................... 224
27.6 loopback-detection recover .................................................................................................. 225
27.7 show loopback-detection global.......................................................................................... 226
27.8 show loopback-detection interface .................................................................................... 226
Chapter 28 DDM Commands ....................................................................................... 228
28.1 ddm state enable ....................................................................................................................... 228
28.2 ddm shutdown ............................................................................................................................ 228
28.3 ddm temperature_threshold .................................................................................................. 229
28.4 ddm voltage_threshold ............................................................................................................ 230
28.5 ddm bias_current_threshold ................................................................................................. 231
28.6 ddm tx_power_threshold ........................................................................................................ 232
28.7 ddm rx_power_threshold ........................................................................................................ 233
28.8 show ddm configuration.......................................................................................................... 234
X
28.9 show ddm status ........................................................................................................................ 235
Chapter 29 ACL Commands ......................................................................................... 236
29.1 time-range .................................................................................................................................... 236
29.2 absolute ........................................................................................................................................ 236
29.3 periodic ......................................................................................................................................... 237
29.4 holiday ........................................................................................................................................... 238
29.5 holiday(global) ............................................................................................................................. 239
29.6 access-list create ...................................................................................................................... 239
29.7 mac access-list .......................................................................................................................... 240
29.8 access-list standard ................................................................................................................. 241
29.9 access-list extended ................................................................................................................ 242
29.10 rule .................................................................................................................................................. 243
29.11 access-list policy name ........................................................................................................... 244
29.12 access-list policy action .......................................................................................................... 245
29.13 redirect interface ....................................................................................................................... 246
29.14 s-condition ................................................................................................................................... 246
29.15 s-mirror.......................................................................................................................................... 247
29.16 qos-remark .................................................................................................................................. 248
29.17 access-list bind acl(interface) ............................................................................................... 249
29.18 access-list bind acl(vlan) ......................................................................................................... 249
29.19 access-list bind(interface) ...................................................................................................... 250
29.20 access-list bind(vlan) ................................................................................................................ 251
29.21 show access-list ........................................................................................................................ 251
29.22 show access-list policy ........................................................................................................... 252
29.23 show access-list bind ............................................................................................................... 252
Chapter 30 MSTP Commands ...................................................................................... 253
30.1 debug spanning-tree ................................................................................................................ 253
30.2 spanning-tree(global) ............................................................................................................... 254
30.3 spanning-tree(interface) ......................................................................................................... 254
30.4 spanning-tree common-config ............................................................................................. 255
30.5 spanning-tree mode ................................................................................................................. 256
30.6 spanning-tree mst configuration ......................................................................................... 257
30.7 instance ......................................................................................................................................... 257
30.8 name ............................................................................................................................................... 258
30.9 revision .......................................................................................................................................... 259
30.10 spanning-tree mst instance ................................................................................................... 260
XI
30.11 spanning-tree mst ..................................................................................................................... 260
30.12 spanning-tree priority .............................................................................................................. 261
30.13 spanning-tree timer .................................................................................................................. 262
30.14 spanning-tree hold-count ....................................................................................................... 263
30.15 spanning-tree max-hops ......................................................................................................... 263
30.16 spanning-tree bpdufilter ......................................................................................................... 264
30.17 spanning-tree bpduguard ....................................................................................................... 265
30.18 spanning-tree guard loop ....................................................................................................... 265
30.19 spanning-tree guard root ........................................................................................................ 266
30.20 spanning-tree guard tc ............................................................................................................ 267
30.21 spanning-tree mcheck ............................................................................................................. 267
30.22 show spanning-tree active ..................................................................................................... 268
30.23 show spanning-tree bridge .................................................................................................... 268
30.24 show spanning-tree interface ............................................................................................... 269
30.25 show spanning-tree interface-security ............................................................................. 270
30.26 show spanning-tree mst ......................................................................................................... 270
Chapter 31 DLDP Commands ...................................................................................... 272
31.1 dldp(global) .................................................................................................................................. 272
31.2 dldp interval ................................................................................................................................. 272
31.3 dldp shut-mode .......................................................................................................................... 273
31.4 dldp reset(global) ....................................................................................................................... 274
31.5 dldp(interface) ............................................................................................................................. 274
31.6 dldp reset(interface) ................................................................................................................. 275
31.7 show dldp ..................................................................................................................................... 275
31.8 show dldp interface................................................................................................................... 276
Chapter 32 IGMP Snooping Commands.................................................................... 277
32.1 ip igmp snooping(global) ......................................................................................................... 277
32.2 ip igmp snooping(interface) ................................................................................................... 277
32.3 ip igmp snooping rtime ............................................................................................................ 278
32.4 ip igmp snooping mtime .......................................................................................................... 279
32.5 ip igmp snooping report-suppression ................................................................................ 279
32.6 ip igmp snooping immediate-leave ..................................................................................... 280
32.7 ip igmp snooping drop-unknown ......................................................................................... 280
32.8 ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval .................................................................... 281
32.9 ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count ..................................................................... 282
32.10 ip igmp snooping vlan-config ................................................................................................ 282
XII
32.11 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (router-port-forbidden) ................................................. 284
32.12 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config ..................................................................................... 285
32.13 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config (router-port-forbidden) ...................................... 286
32.14 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config (source-ip-replace) ............................................. 287
32.15 ip igmp snooping querier vlan ............................................................................................... 287
32.16 ip igmp snooping querier vlan (general query) ................................................................ 288
32.17 ip igmp snooping max-groups .............................................................................................. 289
32.18 ip igmp snooping authentication .......................................................................................... 290
32.19 ip igmp snooping accounting ................................................................................................ 291
32.20 ip igmp profile ............................................................................................................................. 291
32.21 deny ................................................................................................................................................ 292
32.22 permit ............................................................................................................................................. 293
32.23 range .............................................................................................................................................. 293
32.24 ip igmp filter ................................................................................................................................. 294
32.25 clear ip igmp snooping statistics ......................................................................................... 294
32.26 show ip igmp snooping ............................................................................................................ 295
32.27 show ip igmp snooping interface ......................................................................................... 295
32.28 show ip igmp snooping vlan ................................................................................................... 296
32.29 show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan ....................................................................................... 297
32.30 show ip igmp snooping groups ............................................................................................. 297
32.31 show ip igmp snooping querier ............................................................................................. 298
32.32 show ip igmp profile .................................................................................................................. 299
Chapter 33 MLD Snooping Commands ..................................................................... 300
33.1 ipv6 mld snooping(global) ....................................................................................................... 300
33.2 ipv6 mld snooping(interface) ................................................................................................. 300
33.3 ipv6 mld snooping rtime .......................................................................................................... 301
33.4 ipv6 mld snooping mtime ........................................................................................................ 301
33.5 ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression ............................................................................. 302
33.6 ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave ................................................................................... 303
33.7 ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown ....................................................................................... 303
33.8 ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval ................................................................. 304
33.9 ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count ................................................................... 304
33.10 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config .............................................................................................. 305
33.11 ip mld snooping vlan-config (router-port-forbidden) .................................................... 306
33.12 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config .................................................................................. 307
33.13 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config (router-port-forbidden).................................... 308
33.14 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config (source-ip-replace) ........................................... 309
XIII
33.15 ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan ............................................................................................. 310
33.16 ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan (general query) .............................................................. 310
33.17 ipv6 mld snooping max-groups ............................................................................................ 311
33.18 ipv6 mld profile ........................................................................................................................... 313
33.19 deny ................................................................................................................................................ 313
33.20 permit ............................................................................................................................................. 314
33.21 range .............................................................................................................................................. 314
33.22 ipv6 mld filter ............................................................................................................................... 315
33.23 clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics ....................................................................................... 315
33.24 show ipv6 mld snooping .......................................................................................................... 316
33.25 show ipv6 mld snooping interface ....................................................................................... 316
33.26 show ipv6 mld snooping vlan ................................................................................................. 317
33.27 show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan ..................................................................................... 318
33.28 show ipv6 mld snooping groups .......................................................................................... 318
33.29 show ipv6 mld snooping querier .......................................................................................... 319
33.30 show ipv6 mld profile ................................................................................................................ 319
Chapter 34 SNMP Commands ..................................................................................... 321
34.1 snmp-server ................................................................................................................................ 321
34.2 snmp-server view ...................................................................................................................... 321
34.3 snmp-server group ................................................................................................................... 322
34.4 snmp-server user ...................................................................................................................... 324
34.5 snmp-server community ......................................................................................................... 325
34.6 snmp-server host ...................................................................................................................... 326
34.7 snmp-server engineID ............................................................................................................. 328
34.8 snmp-server traps snmp ......................................................................................................... 328
34.9 snmp-server traps link-status ............................................................................................... 329
34.10 snmp-server traps ..................................................................................................................... 330
34.11 snmp-server traps power ....................................................................................................... 331
34.12 snmp-server traps ddm ........................................................................................................... 332
34.13 snmp-server traps vlan ............................................................................................................ 334
34.14 rmon history ................................................................................................................................ 334
34.15 rmon event ................................................................................................................................... 335
34.16 rmon alarm ................................................................................................................................... 336
34.17 rmon statistics ............................................................................................................................ 338
34.18 show snmp-server..................................................................................................................... 339
34.19 show snmp-server view ........................................................................................................... 339
34.20 show snmp-server group ........................................................................................................ 340
XIV
34.21 show snmp-server user ........................................................................................................... 340
34.22 show snmp-server community ............................................................................................. 341
34.23 show snmp-server host ........................................................................................................... 341
34.24 show snmp-server engineID .................................................................................................. 341
34.25 show rmon history ..................................................................................................................... 342
34.26 show rmon event ....................................................................................................................... 343
34.27 show rmon alarm ........................................................................................................................ 343
34.28 show rmon statistics ................................................................................................................ 344
Chapter 35 LLDP Commands ....................................................................................... 345
35.1 lldp................................................................................................................................................... 345
35.2 lldp hold-multiplier ..................................................................................................................... 345
35.3 lldp timer ....................................................................................................................................... 346
35.4 lldp receive ................................................................................................................................... 347
35.5 lldp transmit ................................................................................................................................. 348
35.6 lldp snmp-trap ............................................................................................................................. 348
35.7 lldp tlv-select ............................................................................................................................... 349
35.8 lldp med-fast-count .................................................................................................................. 350
35.9 lldp med-status ........................................................................................................................... 350
35.10 lldp med-tlv-select .................................................................................................................... 351
35.11 lldp med-location ....................................................................................................................... 352
35.12 show lldp ....................................................................................................................................... 353
35.13 show lldp interface .................................................................................................................... 353
35.14 show lldp local-information interface ................................................................................. 354
35.15 show lldp neighbor-information interface ......................................................................... 354
35.16 show lldp traffic interface ....................................................................................................... 355
Chapter 36 AAA Commands ........................................................................................ 356
36.1 aaa enable .................................................................................................................................... 356
36.2 tacacas-server host .................................................................................................................. 357
36.3 show tacacs-server .................................................................................................................. 358
36.4 radius-server host ..................................................................................................................... 358
36.5 show radius-server ................................................................................................................... 360
36.6 aaa group ...................................................................................................................................... 360
36.7 server ............................................................................................................................................. 361
36.8 show aaa group .......................................................................................................................... 362
36.9 aaa authentication login .......................................................................................................... 362
36.10 aaa authentication enable....................................................................................................... 363
XV
36.11 aaa authentication dot1x default .......................................................................................... 364
36.12 aaa accounting dot1x default ................................................................................................ 365
36.13 show aaa authentication ......................................................................................................... 366
36.14 show aaa accounting ................................................................................................................ 366
36.15 line console .................................................................................................................................. 367
36.16 login authentication(console) ................................................................................................ 367
36.17 enable authentication(console) ............................................................................................ 368
36.18 line telnet ...................................................................................................................................... 369
36.19 login authentication(telnet)..................................................................................................... 369
36.20 line ssh ........................................................................................................................................... 370
36.21 login authentication(ssh) ......................................................................................................... 370
36.22 enable authentication(telnet) ................................................................................................. 371
36.23 enable authentication(ssh) ..................................................................................................... 372
36.24 ip http login authentication ..................................................................................................... 373
36.25 ip http enable authentication ................................................................................................. 373
36.26 show aaa global .......................................................................................................................... 374
Chapter 37 DHCP Relay Commands .......................................................................... 375
37.1 service dhcp relay ..................................................................................................................... 375
37.2 ip dhcp relay information ........................................................................................................ 375
37.3 ip dhcp relay information policy ........................................................................................... 376
37.4 ip dhcp relay information custom ........................................................................................ 377
37.5 ip dhcp relay information circuit-id ...................................................................................... 377
37.6 ip dhcp relay information remote-id .................................................................................... 378
37.7 ip dhcp relay default-interface .............................................................................................. 378
37.8 ip dhcp relay vlan ....................................................................................................................... 379
37.9 show ip dhcp relay ..................................................................................................................... 380
Chapter 38 PoE Commands ......................................................................................... 381
38.1 power inline consumption (global) ....................................................................................... 381
38.2 power profile ............................................................................................................................... 381
38.3 power time-range ...................................................................................................................... 383
38.4 absolute ........................................................................................................................................ 383
38.5 periodic ......................................................................................................................................... 384
38.6 power holiday .............................................................................................................................. 386
38.7 holiday ........................................................................................................................................... 386
38.8 power inline consumption (interface) ................................................................................. 387
38.9 power inline priority ................................................................................................................... 388
XVI
38.10 power inline supply .................................................................................................................... 389
38.11 power inline profile .................................................................................................................... 389
38.12 power inline time-range ........................................................................................................... 390
38.13 show power inline ...................................................................................................................... 391
38.14 show power inline configuration interface ........................................................................ 391
38.15 show power inline information interface ........................................................................... 392
38.16 show power profile .................................................................................................................... 392
38.17 show power holiday .................................................................................................................. 393
38.18 show power time-range ........................................................................................................... 393
XVII
Preface
This Guide is intended for network administrator to provide referenced information about CLI
(Command Line Interface). The device mentioned in this Guide stands for T2500G-10MPS
JetStream Gigabit L2 Managed Switch without any explanation.
Overview of this Guide
Chapter 1: Using the CLI
Provide information about how to use the CLI, CLI Command Modes, Security Levels and some
Conventions.
Chapter 2: User Interface
Provide information about the commands used to switch between five CLI Command Modes.
Chapter 3: IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.
Chapter 4: MAC-based VLAN Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring MAC-based VLAN.
Chapter 5: Protocol VLAN Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring Protocol VLAN.
Chapter 6: VLAN-VPN Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring VLAN-VPN (Virtual Private
Network) function.
Chapter 7: L2PT Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring L2PT (Layer 2 Portocol
Tunneling).
Chapter 8: GVRP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring GVRP (GARP VLAN registration
protocol).
Chapter 9: Voice VLAN Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring Voice VLAN.
Chapter 10: Etherchannel Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring LAG (Link Aggregation Group)
and LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol).
Chapter 11: User Management Commands
Provide information about the commands used for user management.
1
Chapter 12: HTTP and HTTPS Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the HTTP and HTTPS logon.
Chapter 13: Binding Table Commands
Provide information about the commands used for binding the IP address, MAC address, VLAN
and the connected Port number of the Host together.
Chapter 14: ARP Inspection Commands
Provide information about the commands used for protecting the switch from the ARP
cheating or ARP Attack.
Chapter 15: DoS Defend Command
Provide information about the commands used for DoS defend and detecting the DoS attack.
Chapter 16: IEEE 802.1X Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring IEEE 802.1X function.
Chapter 17 PPPoE ID Insertion Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring PPPoE ID Insertion.
Chapter 18: System Log Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring system log.
Chapter 19: SSH Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring and managing SSH (Security
Shell).
Chapter 20: MAC Address Commands
Provide information about the commands used for Address configuration.
Chapter 21: System Configuration Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the System information and
System IP, reboot and reset the switch, upgrade the switch system and commands used for
cable test.
Chapter 22: IPv6 Address Configuration Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the System IPv6 addresses.
Chapter 23: Ethernet Configuration Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Bandwidth Control,
Negotiation Mode, and Storm Control for enthernet ports.
Chapter 24: QoS Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the QoS function.
Chapter 25: Port Mirror Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Port Mirror function.
2
Chapter 26: Port Isolation Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring Port Isolation function.
Chapter 27: Loopback Detection Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Loopback Detection
function.
Chapter 28: DDM Commands
Provide information about the commands used for DDM (Digtal Diagnostic Monitoring)
function.
Chapter 29: ACL Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the ACL (Access Control List).
Chapter 30: MSTP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the MSTP (Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol).
Chapter 31: DLDP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DLDP (Device Link
Detection Protocol).
Chapter 32: IGMP Snooping Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the IGMP Snooping (Internet
Group Management Protocol Snooping).
Chapter 33: MLD Snooping Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the MLD Snooping (Multicast
Listener Discovery Snooping).
Chapter 34: SNMP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol) functions.
Chapter 35: LLDP Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring LLDP function.
Chapter 36: AAA Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring AAA (authentication,
authorization and accounting).
Chapter 37: DHCP Relay Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCP Relay function.
Chapter 38: PoE Commands
Provide information about the commands used for configuring PoE function.
3
Chapter 1 Using the CLI
1.1 Accessing the CLI
You can log on to the switch and access the CLI by the following three methods:
1. Log on to the switch by the console port on the switch.
2. Log on to the switch remotely by a Telnet connection through an Ethernet port.
3. Log on to the switch remotely by an SSH connection through an Ethernet port.
1.1.1 Logon by a console port
Console Port
The switch has two console ports: an RJ-45 console port and a Micro-USB console port.
Console output is active on devices connected to both console ports, but console input is only
active on one console port at a time.
The Micro-USB connector takes precedence over the RJ-45 connector. When the switch
detects a valid connection on the Micro-USB console port, input from the RJ-45 console port is
immediately disabled, and input from the Micro-USB console port is enabled. Removing the
Micro-USB connection immediately reenables input from the RJ-45 console connection.
USB Console Driver
If you are using the USB port on the MAC OS X or Linux OS for console connection, there is no
need to run a USB driver.
If you are using the switch’s Micro-USB console port with the USB port of a Windows PC, a
driver for the USB port is required. The USB driver is provided on the resource CD. Follow the
InstallSheild Wizard to accomplish the installation.
The TP-Link USB Console Driver supports the following Windows operating systems:
32-bit Windows XP SP3
64-bit Windows XP
32-bit Windows Vista
64-bit Windows Vista
32-bit Windows 7
64-bit Windows 7
32-bit Windows 8
4
64-bit Windows 8
32-bit Windows 8.1
64-bit Windows 8.1
After the TP-Link USB Console Driver is installed, the PC’s USB port will act as RS-232 serial
port when the PC’s USB port is connected to the switch’s Micro-USB console port. And the
PC’s USB port will act as standard USB port when the PC’s USB port is unplugged from the
switch.
Logon
Take the following steps to log on to the switch by the console port.
1. Connect the PCs or Terminals to the console port on the switch by the provided cable.
2. Start the terminal emulation program (such as the HyperTerminal) on the PC.
3. Specify the connection COM port in the terminal emulation program. If the Micro-USB
Console port is used, you can view which port is assigned to the USB serial port in the
following path:
Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Device Manager -> Ports ->USB Serial Port.
Figure 1-1 USB Serial Port Number
4. Configure the terminal emulation program or the terminal to use the following settings:
Baud rate: 38400 bps
Data bits: 8
Parity: none
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: none
5
5. The DOS prompt ”T2500G-10MPS>” will appear after pressing the Enter button as shown
in Figure 1-2. It indicates that you can use the CLI now.
Figure 1-2 Log in the Switch
1.1.2 Logon by Telnet
For Telnet connection, you should also configure the Telnet login mode and login
authentication information through console connection.
Telnet login has the following two modes. You can choose one according to your needs:
Login Local Mode: It requires username and password, which are both admin by default.
Login Mode: It doesn’t require username and password, but a connection password is
required.
Before Telnet login, you are required to configure Telnet login mode and login authentication
information through console connection.
6
Login Local Mode
Firstly, configure the Telnet login mode as “login local” in the prompted DOS screen shown in
Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 Configure login local mode
Now, you can logon by Telnet in login local mode.
1. Make sure the switch and the PC are in the same LAN. Click Start and type in cmd in the
Search programs and files window and press the Enter button.
Figure 1-4 Run Window
2. Type telnet 192.168.0.1 in the command prompt shown as Figure 1-5, and press the Enter
button.
Figure 1-5 Connecting to the Switch
7
3. Type the default user name and password (both of them are admin), then press the Enter
button so as to enter User EXEC Mode.
Figure 1-6 Enter into the User EXEC Mode
4. Type enable command to enter Privileged EXEC Mode.
Figure 1-7 Enter into the Priviledged EXEC Mode
Now you can manage your switch with CLI commands through Telnet connection.
Login Mode
Firstly configure the Telnet login mode as “login” and the connection password as 456 in the
prompted DOS screen shown in Figure 1-8.
Figure 1-8 Configure login mode
8
Now, you can logon by Telnet in login mode:
1. Make sure the switch and the PC are in the same LAN. Click Start and type in cmd in the
Search programs and files window and press the Enter button.
Figure 1-9 Run Window
2. Type telnet 192.168.0.1 in the command prompt shown as Figure 1-10, and press the
Enter button.
Figure 1-10 Connecting to the Switch
3. You are prompted to enter the connection password 456 you have set through Console
port connection, and then you are in User EXEC Mode.
Figure 1-11 Enter into the User EXEC Mode
9
4. Type enable command to enter Privileged EXEC Mode.
Figure 1-12 Enter into the Privileged EXEC Mode
Now you can manage your switch with CLI commands through Telnet connection.
Note:
You can refer to Chapter 11 User Management Commands for detailed commands
information of the Telnet connection configuration.
1.1.3 Logon by SSH
To log on by SSH, a Putty client software is recommended. There are two authentication modes
to set up an SSH connection:
Password Authentication Mode: It requires username and password, which are both admin by
default.
Key Authentication Mode: It requires a public key for the switch and a private key for the SSH
client software. You can generate the public key and the private key through Putty Key
Generator.
Note:
Before SSH login, please follow the steps shown in Figure 1-13 to enable the SSH function
through Telnet connection.
Figure 1-13 Enable SSH function
10
Password Authentication Mode
1. Open the software to log on to the interface of PuTTY. Enter the IP address of the switch
into Host Name field; keep the default value 22 in the Port field; select SSH as the
Connection type.
Figure 1-14 SSH Connection Config
2. Click the Open button in the above figure to log on to the switch. Enter the login user name
and password to log on the switch, and then enter enable to enter Privileged EXEC Mode,
so you can continue to configure the switch.
Figure 1-15 Log on the Switch
11
Key Authentication Mode
1. Select the key type and key length, and generate SSH key.
Figure 1-16 Generate SSH Key
Note:
1. The key length is in the range of 512 to 3072 bits.
2. During the key generation, randomly moving the mouse quickly can accelerate the key
generation.
12
2. After the key is successfully generated, please save the public key and private key to a
TFTP server.
Figure 1-17 Save the Generated Key
3. Log on to the switch by Telnet and download the public key file from the TFTP server to the
switch, as the following figure shows:
Figure 1-18 Download the Public Key
13
Note:
1. The key type should accord with the type of the key file.
2. The SSH key downloading can not be interrupted.
4. After the public key is downloaded, please log on to the interface of PuTTY and enter the IP
address for login.
Figure 1-19 SSH Connection Config
14
5. Click Browse to download the private key file to SSH client software and click Open.
Figure 1-20 Download the Private Key
6. After successful authentication, please enter the login user name. If you log on to the
switch without entering password, it indicates that the key has been successfully
downloaded.
Figure 1-21 Log on the Switch
1.2 CLI Command Modes
The CLI is divided into different command modes: User EXEC Mode, Privileged EXEC Mode,
Global Configuration Mode, Interface Configuration Mode and VLAN Configuration Mode.
15
Interface Configuration Mode can also be divided into Interface Ethernet, Interface
link-aggregation and some other modes, which is shown as the following diagram.
The following table gives detailed information about the Accessing path, Prompt of each mode
and how to exit the current mode and access the next mode.
Mode Accessing Path Prompt Logout or Access the
next mode
User EXEC
Mode
Primary mode once
it is connected with
the switch.
T2500G-10MPS>
Use the exit command to
disconnect the switch.
Use the enable command to
access Privileged EXEC mode.
Privileged
EXEC Mode
Use the enable
command to enter
this mode from
User EXEC mode.
T2500G-10MPS#
Enter the disable or the exit
command to return to User
EXEC mode.
Enter configure command to
access Global Configuration
mode.
Global
Configuration
Mode
Use the configure
command to enter
this mode from
Privileged EXEC
mode.
T2500G-10MPS(config)#
Use the exit or the end
command or press Ctrl+Z to
return to Privileged EXEC
mode.
Use the interface
gigabitEthernet
port
or
interface range
gigabitEthernet
port-list
command to access interface
Configuration mode.
Use the vlan
vlan-list
to access
VLAN Configuration mode.
Interface
Configuration
Mode
Layer 2 Interface:
Use the interface
gigabitEthernet
port,
interface
port-channel
port-channel-id
or
interface range
gigabitEthernet
port-list
command
to enter this mode
from Global
Configuration
mode.
T2500G-10MPS (config-if)#
or
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)#
Use the end command or press
Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Enter the exit or the #
command to return to Global
Configuration mode.
A port number must be
specified in the interface
command.
16
Mode Accessing Path Prompt Logout or Access the
next mode
Interface
Configuration
Mode
Layer 3 Interface:
Use the no
switchport
command to enter
Routed Port mode
from Interface
Configuration
mode.
Use the interface
vlan
vlan-id
command to enter
VLAN Interface
mode from Global
Configuration
mode.
Use the interface
loopback
id
command to enter
Loopback Interface
mode from Global
Configuration
mode.
T2500G-10MPS (config-if)#
or
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)#
Use the switchport command
to switch to the Layer 2
interface mode.
Use the end command or press
Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Enter the exit or the #
command to return to Global
Configuration mode.
VLAN
Configuration
Mode
Use the vlan
vlan-list
command
to enter this mode
from Global
Configuration
mode.
T2500G-10MPS (config-vlan)#
Use the end command or press
Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged
EXEC mode.
Enter the exit command or the
# command to return to Global
configuration mode.
Note:
1. The user is automatically in User EXEC Mode after the connection between the PC and the
switch is established by a Telnet/SSH connection.
2. Each command mode has its own set of specific commands. To configure some
commands, you should access the corresponding command mode firstly.
Global Configuration Mode: In this mode, global commands are provided, such as the
Spanning Tree, Schedule Mode and so on.
Interface Configuration Mode: In this mode, users can configure one or several ports,
different ports corresponds to different commands
a). Interface gigabitEthernet: Configure parameters for an Ethernet port, such as
Duplex-mode, flow control status.
17
b). Interface range gigabitEthernet: Configure parameters for several Ethernet ports.
c). Interface link-aggregation: Configure parameters for a link-aggregation, such as
broadcast storm.
d). Interface range link-aggregation: Configure parameters for multi-trunks.
e). Interface vlan: Configure parameters for the vlan-port.
VLAN Configuration Mode: In this mode, users can create a VLAN and add a specified
port to the VLAN.
3. Some commands are global, that means they can be performed in all modes:
show: Display all information of switch, for example: statistic information, port
information, VLAN information.
history: Display the commands history.
1.3 Privilege Restrictions
This switch’s security is divided into four privilege levels: User level, Power User level, Operator
level and Admin level. You can define username and password pairs, and assign a specific
privilege level to each pair. Different privilege levels have access to specified commands,
which is illustrated in the Privilege Requirement in each command. For details about how to
configure usename and password pairs, please refer to user name (password) and user name
(secret).
Users can enter Privileged EXEC mode from User EXEC mode by using the enable command. In
default case, no password is needed. In Global Configuration Mode, you can configure
password for Admin level by enable password command. Once password is configured, you
are required to enter it to access Privileged EXEC mode.
1.4 Conventions
1.4.1 Format Conventions
The following conventions are used in this Guide:
Items in square brackets [ ] are optional
Items in braces { } are required
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. For example:
speed {10 | 100 | 1000 }
18
Bold indicates an unalterable keyword. For example: show logging
Normal Font indicates a constant (several options are enumerated and only one can be
selected). For example: mode {dynamic | static | permanent}
Italic Font indicates a variable (an actual value must be assigned). For example: bridge
aging-time
aging-time
1.4.2 Special Characters
You should pay attentions to the description below if the variable is a character string:
These six characters ” < > , \ & can not be input.
If a blank is contained in a character string, single or double quotation marks should be
used, for example ’hello world’, ”hello world”, and the words in the quotation marks will be
identified as a string. Otherwise, the words will be identified as several strings.
1.4.3 Parameter Format
Some parameters must be entered in special formats which are shown as follows:
MAC address must be enter in the format of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.
One or several values can be typed for a port-list or a vlan-list using comma to separate.
Use a hyphen to designate a range of values, for instance,1/0/1,1/0/3-5,1/0/7 indicates
choosing port 1/0/1,1/0/3,1/0/4,1/0/5,1/0/7.
19
Chapter 2 User Interface
2.1 enable
Description
The enable command is used to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User
EXEC Mode.
Syntax
enable
Command Mode
User EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
If you have set the password to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User
EXEC Mode:
T2500G-10MPS>enable
Enter password
：
T2500G-10MPS#
2.2 service password-encryption
Description
The service password-encryption command is used to encrypt the
password when the password is defined or when the configuration is written,
using the symmetric encryption algorithm. Encryption prevents the password
from being readable in the configuration file. To disable the global encryption
function, please use no service password-encryption command.
Syntax
service password-encryption
no service password-encryption
20
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the global encryption function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# service password-encryption
2.3 enable password
Description
The enable password command is used to set or change the password for
users to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. To remove the
password, please use no enable password command. This command uses
the symmetric encryption.
Syntax
enable password { [ 0 ]
password
| 7
encrypted-password
}
no enable password
Parameter
0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password
will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.
password
—— Super password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric
characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English
letters (case sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters
( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ). By default, it is empty.
7 —— Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow.
encrypted-password
—— A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length,
which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the
encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding
unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
21
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global
encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the
password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric
encrypted form.
Example
Set the super password as “admin” and unencrypted to access Privileged
EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#enable password 0 admin
2.4 enable secret
Description
The enable secret command is used to set a secret password, which is using
an MD5 encryption algorithm, for users to access Privileged EXEC Mode from
User EXEC Mode. To return to the default configuration, please use no enable
secret command. This command uses the MD5 encryption.
Syntax
enable secret { [ 0 ]
password
| 5
encrypted-password
}
no enable secret
Parameter
0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password
will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.
password
—— Super password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric
characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English
letters (case sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters
( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ). By default, it is empty. The password in the configuration file
will be displayed in the MD5 encrypted form.
5 —— Indicates an MD5 encrypted password with fixed length will follow.
encrypted-password
—— An MD5 encrypted password with fixed length,
which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the
22
encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding
unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
If both the enable password and enable secret are defined, you must enter
the password set in enable secret.
Example
Set the secret password as “admin” and unencrypted to access Privileged
EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. The password will be displayed in the
encrypted form.
T2500G-10MPS(config)#enable secret 0 admin
2.5 configure
Description
The configure command is used to access Global Configuration Mode from
Privileged EXEC Mode.
Syntax
configure
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Access Global Configuration Mode from Privileged EXEC Mode:
T2500G-10MPS# configure
T2500G-10MPS(config)#
23
2.6 exit
Description
The exit command is used to return to the previous Mode from the current
Mode.
Syntax
exit
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Return to Global Configuration Mode from Interface Configuration Mode, and
then return to Privileged EXEC Mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# exit
T2500G-10MPS(config)#exit
T2500G-10MPS#
2.7 end
Description
The end command is used to return to Privileged EXEC Mode.
Syntax
end
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Return to Privileged EXEC Mode from Interface Configuration Mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#end
T2500G-10MPS#
24
2.8 history
Description
The history command is used to show the latest 20 commands you entered
in the current mode since the switch is powered.
Syntax
history
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Show the commands you have entered in the current mode:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# history
1 history
2.9 history clear
Description
The history clear command is used to clear the commands you have entered
in the current mode, therefore these commands will not be shown next time
you use the history command.
Syntax
history clear
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear the commands you have entered in the current mode:
25
T2500G-10MPS(config)#history clear
26
Chapter 3 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) technology is developed for the switch to divide the LAN
into multiple logical LANs flexibly. Hosts in the same VLAN can communicate with each other,
regardless of their physical locations. VLAN can enhance performance by conserving
bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains.
3.1 vlan
Description
The vlan command is used to create IEEE 802.1Q VLAN and enter VLAN
Configuration Mode. To delete the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, please use no vlan
command.
Syntax
vlan
vlan-list
no vlan
vlan-list
Parameter
vlan-list
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID list, ranging from 2 to 4094, in the
format of 2-3, 5. It is multi-optional.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create VLAN 2-10 and VLAN 100:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# vlan 2-10,100
Delete VLAN 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# no vlan 2
27
3.2 interface vlan
Description
The interface vlan command is used to create VLAN Interface and enter
Interface VLAN Mode. To delete VLAN Interface, please use no interface
vlan command.
Syntax
interface vlan
vlan-id
no interface vlan
vlan-id
Parameter
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create VLAN Interface 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 2
3.3 name
Description
The name command is used to assign a description to a VLAN. To clear the
description, please use no name command.
Syntax
name
descript
no name
Parameter
descript
——String to describe the VLAN, which contains 16 characters at
most.
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration Mode（VLAN）
28
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the name of VLAN 2 as “group1”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# vlan 2
T2500G-10MPS(config-vlan)# name group1
3.4 switchport mode
Description
The switchport mode command is used to configure the Link Types for the
ports.
Syntax
switchport mode { access | trunk | general }
Parameter
access | trunk | general —— Link Types. There are three Link Types for the
ports.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the Link Type of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 as “trunk”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#switchport mode trunk
29
3.5 switchport access vlan
Description
The switchport access vlan command is used to add the desired Access
port to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, or to remove a port from the corresponding VLAN.
Syntax
switchport access vlan
vlan-id
no switchport access vlan
Parameter
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 whose link type is “access” to VLAN 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#switchport access vlan 2
3.6 switchport trunk allowed vlan
Description
The switchport trunk allowed vlan command is used to add the desired
Trunk port to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. To remove a Trunk port from the
corresponding VLAN, please use no switchport trunk allowed vlan
command.
Syntax
switchport trunk allowed vlan {
vlan-list
}
no switchport trunk allowed vlan {
vlan-list
}
30
Parameter
vlan-list
—— VLAN ID list, ranging from 2 to 4094, in the format of 2-3, 5. It is
multi-optional.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the link type of port 2 as trunk and add it to VLAN 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#switchport mode trunk
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#switchport trunk allowed vlan 2
3.7 switchport general allowed vlan
Description
The switchport general allowed vlan command is used to add the desired
General port to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, or to remove a port from the
corresponding VLAN.
Syntax
switchport general allowed vlan
vlan-list
{ tagged | untagged }
no switchport general allowed vlan
vlan-list
Parameter
vlan-list
—— VLAN ID list, ranging from 2 to 4094, in the format of 2-3, 5. It is
multi-optional.
tagged | untagged —— egress-rule.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
31
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/4 whose link type is “general” to VLAN 2
and its egress-rule as “tagged”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#switchport mode general
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#switchport general allowed vlan 2 tagged
3.8 switchport pvid
Description
The switchport pvid command is used to configure the PVID for the switch
ports.
Syntax
switchport pvid
vlan-id
Parameter
vlan-id
—— VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the PVID of port 1/0/2 as 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# switchport pvid 2
32
3.9 show vlan summary
Description
The show vlan summary command is used to display the summarized
information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.
Syntax
show vlan summary
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the summarized information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show vlan summary
3.10 show vlan brief
Description
The show vlan brief command is used to display the brief information of IEEE
802.1Q VLAN.
Syntax
show vlan brief
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the brief information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show vlan brief
33
3.11 show vlan
Description
The show vlan command is used to display the information of IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN.
Syntax
show vlan [ id
vlan-id
]
Parameter
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. It is
multi-optional. Using the show vlan command without parameter displays the
detailed information of all VLANs.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of vlan 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show vlan id 5
3.12 show interface switchport
Description
The show interface switchport command is used to display the IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN configuration information of the specified port/port channel.
Syntax
show interface switchport [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
34
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the VLAN configuration information of all ports and port channels:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show interface switchport
35
Chapter 4 MAC-based VLAN Commands
MAC VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is the way to classify the VLANs based on MAC
Address. A MAC address is relative to a single VLAN ID. The untagged packets and the
priority-tagged packets coming from the MAC address will be tagged with this VLAN ID.
4.1 mac-vlan mac-address
Description
The mac-vlan mac-address command is used to create a MAC-based VLAN
entry. To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, please use the no mac-vlan
mac-address command.
Syntax
mac-vlan mac-address
mac-addr
vlan
vlan-id
[description
descript
]
no mac-vlan mac-address
mac-addr
Parameter
mac-addr
—— MAC address, in the format of XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
descript
—— Give a description to the MAC address for identification, which
contains 8 characters at most.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create VLAN 2 with the MAC address 00:11:11:01:01:12 and the name “TP”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#mac-vlan mac-address 00:11:11:01:01:12 vlan 2
description TP
36
4.2 mac-vlan
Description
The mac-vlan command is used to enable a port for the MAC-based VLAN
feature. Only the port is enabled can the configured MAC-based VLAN take
effect. To disable the MAC-based VLAN function, please use no mac-vlan
command. All the ports are disabled by default.
Syntax
mac-vlan
no mac-vlan
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 for the MAC-based VLAN feature:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#mac-vlan
4.3 show mac-vlan
Description
The show mac-vlan command is used to display the information of the
MAC-based VLAN entry. MAC address and VLAN ID can be used to filter the
displayed information.
Syntax
show mac-vlan { all | mac-address
mac-addr
| vlan
vlan-id
}
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
37
Privilege Requirement
None.
Parameter
mac-addr
—— MAC address, in the format of XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Example
Display the information of all the MAC-based VLAN entry:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show mac-vlan all
4.4 show mac-vlan interface
Description
The show mac-vlan interface command is used to display the port state of
MAC-based VLAN.
Syntax
show mac-vlan interface
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the enable state of all the ports:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show mac-vlan interface
38
Chapter 5 Protocol-based VLAN Commands
Protocol VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is the way to classify VLANs based on Protocols. A
Protocol is relative to a single VLAN ID. The untagged packets and the priority-tagged packets
matching the protocol template will be tagged with this VLAN ID.
5.1 protocol-vlan template
Description
The protocol-vlan template command is used to create Protocol-based
VLAN template. To delete Protocol-based VLAN template, please use no
protocol-vlan template command.
Syntax
protocol-vlan template name
protocol-name
ether-type
type
no protocol-vlan template
template-idx
Parameter
protocol-name
—— Give a name for the Protocol-based VLAN Template ,
which contains 8 characters at most.
ether-type
type
—— Specify the Ethernet type.
template-idx
—— The number of the Protocol-based VLAN Template. You
can get the template corresponding to the number by the show
protocol-vlan template command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a Protocol-based VLAN template named “TP” whose Ethernet
protocol type is 0x2024:
T2500G-10MPS (config)#protocol-vlan template name TP ether-type 2024
39
5.2 protocol-vlan vlan
Description
The protocol-vlan vlan command is used to create a Protocol-based VLAN
entry. To delete a Protocol-based VLAN entry, please use no protocol-vlan
vlan command.
Syntax
protocol-vlan vlan
vlan-id
template
template-idx
no protocol-vlan vlan
group-idx
Parameter
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1-4094.
template-idx
——The number of the Protocol-based VLAN Template. You can
get the template corresponding to the number by the show protocol-vlan
template command.
group-idx
——The number of the Protocol-based VLAN entry. You can get
the Protocol-based VLAN entry corresponding to the number by the show
protocol-vlan vlan command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create Protocol-based VLAN 2 and bind it with Protocol-based VLAN Template
3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#protocol-vlan vlan 2 template 3
5.3 protocol-vlan group
Description
The protocol-vlan command is used to add the port to a specified protocol
group. To remove the port from this protocol group, please use no
protocol-vlan group command.
40
Syntax
protocol-vlan group
index
no protocol-vlan group
index
Parameter
index
—— Specify the protocol group ID.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add Gigabit Ethernet port 20 to protocol group 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#protocol-vlan group 1
5.4 show protocol-vlan template
Description
The show protocol-vlan template command is used to display the
information of the Protocol-based VLAN templates.
Syntax
show protocol-vlan template
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of the Protocol-based VLAN templates:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show protocol-vlan template
41
5.5 show protocol-vlan vlan
Description
The show protocol-vlan vlan command is used to display the information
about Protocol-based VLAN entry.
Syntax
show protocol-vlan vlan
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display information of the Protocol-based VLAN entry:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show protocol-vlan vlan
42
Chapter 6 VLAN-VPN Commands
VLAN-VPN (Virtual Private Network) function, the implement of a simple and flexible Layer 2
VPN technology, allows the packets with VLAN tags of private networks to be encapsulated
with VLAN tags of public networks at the network access terminal of the Internet Service
Provider. And these packets will be transmitted with double-tag across the public networks.
6.1 dot1q-tunnel
Description
The dot1q-tunnel command is used to enable the VLAN-VPN function
globally. To disable the VLAN-VPN function, please use the no dot1q-tunnel
command.
Syntax
dot1q-tunnel
no dot1q-tunnel
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the VLAN-VPN function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#dot1q-tunnel
6.2 dot1q-tunnel tpid
Description
The dot1q-tunnel tpid command is used to configure Global TPID of the
VLAN-VPN. To restore to the default value, please use the no dot1q-tunnel
tpid command.
43
Syntax
dot1q-tunnel tpid
tpid
no dot1q-tunnel tpid
Parameter
tpid
—— The value of Global TPID. It must be 4 Hex integers. By default, it is
8100.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure Global TPID of the VLAN-VPN as 0x9100:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#dot1q-tunnel tpid 9100
6.3 switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping
Description
The switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping command is used add the VLAN
Mapping entry on a specified port. To delete the VLAN Mapping entry on this
port, please use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping command.
Syntax
switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping
c-vlan
sp-vlan
[
descript
]
no switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping
c-vlan
Parameter
c-vlan
—— Customer VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
sp-vlan
—— Service Provider VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
descript
—— Give a description to the VLAN Mapping entry, which contains
15 characters at most.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
44
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add a VLAN Mapping entry on the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 with the
Customer VLAN as VLAN 2 and the Service Provider VLAN as VLAN 3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping 2 3
6.4 switchport dot1q-tunnel mode nni
Description
The switchport dot1q-tunnel mode nni command is used to configure the
VPN port as NNI port which is connected to the ISP. To close this VPN port,
please use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel mode command. By default, no
port has been configured as the VPN port.
Syntax
switchport dot1q-tunnel mode nni
no switchport dot1q-tunnel mode
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 as the VPN NNI port:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode nni
45
6.5 show dot1q-tunnel
Description
The show dot1q-tunnel command is used to display the global configuration
information of the VLAN VPN.
Syntax
show dot1q-tunnel
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration information of the VLAN VPN:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show dot1q-tunnel
6.6 show dot1q-tunnel mapping
Description
The show dot1q-tunnel mapping command is used to display the
information of VLAN Mapping entry.
Syntax
show dot1q-tunnel mapping
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of VLAN Mapping entry:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show dot1q-tunnel mapping
46
6.7 show dot1q-tunnel interface
Description
The show dot1q-tunnel mapping interface command is used to display the
VLAN VPN port type.
Syntax
show dot1q-tunnel interface
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the port type of all VLAN VPN ports:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show dot1q-tunnel interface
47
Chapter 7 L2PT Commands
L2PT (Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling) is a feature for service providers to transmit packets from
different customers across their ISP networks and maintain Layer 2 protocol configurations of
each customer. The supported Layer 2 protocols are STP (Spanning Tree Protocol), GVRP
(GARP VLAN Registration Protocol), CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol), VTP (VLAN Trunking
Protocol), PAgP (Port Aggregation Protocol), UDLD (UniDirectional Link Detection) and
PVST+(Per VLAN Spanning Tree Plus).
7.1 l2protocol-tunnel
Description
The l2protocol-tunnel command is used to enable the layer 2 protocol
tunneling (L2PT) function globally. To disable the L2PT function, please use
no l2protocol-tunnel command.
Syntax
l2protocol-tunnel
no l2protocol-tunnel
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the L2PT function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# l2protocol-tunnel
7.2 l2protocol-tunnel type
Description
The l2protocol-tunnel type command is used to configure the L2PT function
on a specified port. To disable the L2PT function on the specified port, please
use no l2protocol-tunnel command.
48
Syntax
l2protocol-tunnel type nni
l2protocol-tunnel type uni { 01000ccccccc | 01000ccccccd | gvrp | stp | all }
[ threshold
threshold
]
no l2protocol-tunnel
Parameter
nni —— Specify the port type according to its connecting device in the
network. Specify the port’s type as NNI if it is connecting to the ISP network.
uni —— Specify the port type according to its connecting device in the
network. Specify the port’s type as UNI if it is connecting to the user’s local
network.
01000ccccccc | 01000ccccccd | gvrp | stp | lacp | all —— Select the
supported Layer 2 protocol type. Packets of the specified protocol will be
encapsulated with their destination MAC address before they are sent to the
ISP network. Packets will be decapsulated to restore their Layer 2 protocol
and MAC address information before they are sent to the customer network.
• 01000ccccccc: Enable protocol tunneling for the packets with
destination MAC address 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC. 01-00-0CC-CC-CC-CC is
used as the destination MAC address of the CDP/VTP/PAgP/UDLD packets.
• 01000ccccccd: Enable protocol tunneling for the packets with
destination MAC address 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD. 01-00-0CC-CC-CC-CD is
used as the destination MAC address of Cisco PVST+ BPDUs.
• gvrp: Enable protocol tunneling for the GVRP packets.
• stp: Enable protocol tunneling for the STP packets.
• all: All the above Layer 2 protocols are supported for tunneling.
threshold
——Configure the threshold for packets-per-second accepted for
encapsulation. Packets beyond the threshold will be dropped. It ranges from
0 to 1000.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
49
Example
Configure port 1/0/3 as a UNI port for STP packets with the threshold as 1000
packets/second:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel type uni stp threshold 1000
7.3 show l2protocol-tunnel global
Description
The show l2protocol-tunnel global command is used to display the global
L2PT status.
Syntax
show l2protocol-tunnel global
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global L2PT status:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show l2protocol-tunnel global
7.4 show l2protocol-tunnel interface
Description
The show l2protocol-tunnel interface command is used to display the L2PT
configuration information of a specified Ethernet port or of all Ethernet ports.
Syntax
show l2protocol-tunnel interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
50
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the L2PT configuration information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show l2protocol-tunnel interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/1
Display the L2PT configuration information of all Ethernet ports:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show l2protocol-tunnel interface
51
Chapter 8 GVRP Commands
GVRP (GARP VLAN registration protocol) is an implementation of GARP (generic attribute
registration protocol). GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via
the dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration
information to other switches, without having to individually configure each VLAN.
8.1 gvrp
Description
The gvrp command is used to enable the GVRP function globally. To disable
the GVRP function, please use no gvrp command.
Syntax
gvrp
no gvrp
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the GVRP function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#gvrp
8.2 gvrp (interface)
Description
The gvrp command is used to enable the GVRP function for the desired port.
To disable it, please use no gvrp command. The GVRP feature can only be
enabled for the trunk-type ports.
Syntax
gvrp
52
no gvrp
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the GVRP function for Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-6:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)#gvrp
8.3 gvrp registration
Description
The gvrp registration command is used to configure the GVRP registration
type for the desired port. To restore to the default value, please use no gvrp
registration command.
Syntax
gvrp registration { normal | fixed | forbidden }
no gvrp registration
Parameter
normal | fixed | forbidden —— Registration mode. By default, the registration
mode is “normal”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
53
Example
Configure the GVRP registration mode as “fixed” for Gigabit Ethernet ports
1/0/2-6:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)#gvrp registration fixed
8.4 gvrp timer
Description
The gvrp timer command is used to set a GVRP timer for the desired port. To
restore to the default setting of a GARP timer, please use no gvrp timer
command.
Syntax
gvrp timer { leaveall | join | leave }
value
no gvrp timer [leaveall | join | leave]
Parameter
leaveall | join | leave —— They are the three timers: leave All, join and leave.
Once the LeaveAll Timer is set, the port with GVRP enabled can send a
LeaveAll message after the timer times out, so that other GARP ports can
re-register all the attribute information. After that, the LeaveAll timer will start
to begin a new cycle. To guarantee the transmission of the Join messages, a
GARP port sends each Join message two times. The Join Timer is used to
define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join
message. Once the Leave Timer is set, the GARP port receiving a Leave
message will start its Leave timer, and deregister the attribute information if it
does not receive a Join message again before the timer times out.
value
——The value of the timer. The LeaveAll Timer ranges from 1000 to
30000 centiseconds and the default value is 1000 centiseconds. The Join
Timer ranges from 20 to 1000 centiseconds and the default value is 20
centiseconds. The Leave Timer ranges from 60 to 3000 centiseconds and
the default value is 60 centiseconds.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
54
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the GARP leaveall timer of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/6 as 2000
centiseconds and restore the join timer of it to the default value:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/6
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#gvrp timer leaveall 2000
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#no gvrp timer join
8.5 show gvrp interface
Description
The show gvrp interface command is used to display the GVRP
configuration information of a specified Ethernet port or of all Ethernet ports.
Syntax
show gvrp interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the GVRP configuration information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show gvrp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Display the GVRP configuration information of all Ethernet ports:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show gvrp interface
55
8.6 show gvrp global
Description
The show gvrp global command is used to display the global GVRP status.
Syntax
show gvrp global
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global GVRP status:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show gvrp global
56
Chapter 9 Voice VLAN Commands
Voice VLANs are configured specially for voice data stream. By configuring Voice VLANs and
adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLANs, you can perform QoS-related
configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice
quality.
9.1 voice vlan
Description
The voice vlan command is used to enable Voice VLAN function. To disable
Voice VLAN function, please use no voice vlan command.
Syntax
voice vlan
vlan-id
no voice vlan
Parameter
vlan-id
—— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Voice VLAN function for VLAN 10:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# voice vlan 10
9.2 voice vlan aging
Description
The voice vlan aging command is used to set the aging time for a voice
VLAN. To restore to the default aging time for the Voice VLAN, please use no
voice vlan aging command.
57
Syntax
voice vlan aging
time
no voice vlan aging
Parameter
time
—— Aging time (in minutes) to be set for the Voice VLAN. It ranges from
1 to 43200 minutes and the default value is 1440 minutes.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the aging time for the Voice VLAN as 1 minute:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# voice vlan aging 1
9.3 voice vlan priority
Description
The voice vlan priority command is used to configure the priority for the
Voice VLAN. To restore to the default priority, please use no voice vlan
priority command.
Syntax
voice vlan priority
pri
no voice vlan priority
Parameter
pri
—— Priority, ranging from 0 to 7, and the default value is 6.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
58
Example
Configure the priority of the Voice VLAN as 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# voice vlan priority 5
9.4 voice vlan mac-address
Description
The voice vlan mac-address command is used to create Voice VLAN OUI. To
delete the specified Voice VLAN OUI, please use no voice vlan mac-address
command.
Syntax
voice vlan mac-address
mac-addr
mask
mask
[ description
descript
]
no voice vlan mac-address
mac-addr
Parameter
mac-addr
—— The OUI address of the voice device, in the format of
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.
mask
—— The OUI address mask of the voice device, in the format of
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.
descript
——Give a description to the OUI for identification which contains 16
characters at most.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a Voice VLAN OUI described as TP-Phone with the OUI address
00:11:11:11:11:11 and the mask address FF:FF:FF:00:00:00:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#voice vlan mac-address 00:11:11:11:11:11 mask
FF:FF:FF:00:00:00 description TP-Phone
59
9.5 switchport voice vlan mode
Description
The switchport voice vlan mode command is used to configure the Voice
VLAN mode for the Ethernet port.
Syntax
switchport voice vlan mode { manual | auto }
Parameter
manual | auto
—— Port mode.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the port 1/0/3 to operate in the auto voice VLAN mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# switchport voice vlan mode auto
9.6 switchport voice vlan security
Description
The switchport voice vlan security command is used to enable the Voice
VLAN security feature. To disable the Voice VLAN security feature, please
use no switchport voice vlan security command.
Syntax
switchport voice vlan security
no switchport voice vlan security
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
60
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable port 1/0/3 for the Voice VLAN security feature:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# switchport voice vlan security
9.7 show voice vlan
Description
The show voice vlan command is used to display the global configuration
information of Voice VLAN.
Syntax
show voice vlan
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Display the configuration information of Voice VLAN globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show voice vlan
9.8 show voice vlan oui
Description
The show voice vlan oui command is used to display the configuration
information of Voice VLAN OUI.
Syntax
show voice vlan oui
61
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Display the configuration information of Voice VLAN OUI:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show voice vlan oui
9.9 show voice vlan switchport
Description
The show voice vlan switchport command is used to display the Voice VLAN
configuration information of a specified port/port channel.
Syntax
show voice vlan switchport [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Display the Voice VLAN configuration information of all ports and port
channels:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show voice vlan switchport
Display the Voice VLAN configuration information of port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show voice vlan switchport gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
62
Chapter 10 Etherchannel Commands
Etherchannel Commands are used to configure LAG and LACP function.
LAG (Link Aggregation Group) is to combine a number of ports together to make a single
high-bandwidth data path, which can highly extend the bandwidth. The bandwidth of the LAG is
the sum of bandwidth of its member port.
LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) is defined in IEEE802.3ad and enables the dynamic
link aggregation and disaggregation by exchanging LACP packets with its partner. The switch
can dynamically group similarly configured ports into a single logical link, which will highly
extend the bandwidth and flexibly balance the load.
10.1 channel-group
Description
The channel-group command is used to add a port to the EtherChannel
Group and configure its mode. To delete the port from the EtherChannel
Group, please use no channel-group command.
Syntax
channel-group
num
mode { on | active | passive }
no channel-group
Parameter
num
—— The number of the EtherChannel Group, ranging from 1 to 14.
on —— Enable the static LAG.
active —— Enable the active LACP mode.
passive —— Enable the passive LACP mode.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
63
Example
Add ports 2-4 to EtherChannel Group 1 and enable the static LAG:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)# channel-group 1 mode on
10.2 port-channel load-balance
Description
The port-channel load-balance command is used to configure the
Aggregate Arithmetic for LAG. To return to the default configurations, please
use no port-channel load-balance command.
Syntax
port-channel load-balance { src-mac | dst-mac | src-dst-mac | src-ip | dst-ip |
src-dst-ip }
no port-channel load-balance
Parameter
src-mac —— The source MAC address. When this option is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source MAC address of the
packets.
dst-mac —— The destination MAC address. When this option is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the destination MAC address of the
packets.
src-dst-mac —— The source and destination MAC address. When this option
is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source and
destination MAC addresses of the packets. The Aggregate Arithmetic for
LAG is “src-dst-mac” by default.
src-ip —— The source IP address. When this option is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source IP address of the packets.
dst-ip —— The destination IP address. When this option is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the destination IP address of the
packets.
src-dst-ip —— The source and destination IP address. When this option is
selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source and
destination IP addresses of the packets.
64
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Aggregate Arithmetic for LAG as “src-dst-ip”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# port-channel load-balance src-dst-ip
10.3 lacp system-priority
Description
The lacp system-priority command is used to configure the LACP system
priority globally. To return to the default configurations, please use no lacp
system-priority command.
Syntax
lacp system-priority
pri
no lacp system-priority
Parameter
pri
—— The system priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. It is 32768 by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the LACP system priority as 1024 globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# lacp system-priority 1024
65
10.4 lacp port-priority
Description
The lacp port-priority command is used to configure the LACP port priority
for specified ports. To return to the default configurations, please use no lacp
port-priority command.
Syntax
lacp port-priority
pri
no lacp port-priority
Parameter
pri
—— The port priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. It is 32768 by default.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the LACP port priority as 1024 for ports 1-3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)# lacp port-priority 1024
Configure the LACP port priority as 2048 for port 4:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# lacp port-priority 2048
10.5 show etherchannel
Description
The show etherchannel command is used to display the EtherChannel
information.
Syntax
show etherchannel [
channel-group-num
] { detail | summary }
66
Parameter
channel-group-num
—— The EtherChannel Group number, ranging from 1 to
14. By default, it is empty, and will display the information of all EtherChannel
Groups.
detail —— The detailed information of EtherChannel.
summary —— The EtherChannel information in summary.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the detailed information of EtherChannel Group 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show etherchannel 1 detail
10.6 show etherchannel load-balance
Description
The show etherchannel load-balance command is used to display the
Aggregate Arithmetic of LAG.
Syntax
show etherchannel load-balance
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the Aggregate Arithmetic of LAG:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show etherchannel load-balance
67
10.7 show lacp
Description
The show lacp command is used to display the LACP information for a
specified EtherChannel Group.
Syntax
show lacp [
channel-group-num
] { internal
|
neighbor }
Parameter
channel-group-num
—— The EtherChannel Group number, ranging from 1 to
14. By default, it is empty, and will display the information of all LACP groups.
internal —— The internal LACP information.
neighbor —— The neighbor LACP information.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the internal LACP information of EtherChannel Group 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show lacp 1 internal
10.8 show lacp sys-id
Description
The show lacp sys-id command is used to display the LACP system priority
globally.
Syntax
show lacp sys-id
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
68
Example
Display the LACP system priority:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show lacp sys-id
69
Chapter 11 User Management Commands
User Manage Commands are used to manage the user’s logging information by Web, Telnet or
SSH, so as to protect the settings of the switch from being randomly changed.
11.1 user name (password)
Description
The user name command is used to add a new user or modify the existed
users’ information. To delete the existed users, please use no user name
command. This command uses the symmetric encryption.
Syntax
user name
name
[ privilege admin | operator | power_user | user ] password
{ [ 0 ]
password
| 7
encrypted-password
}
no user name
name
Parameter
name
——Type a name for users' login, which contains 16 characters at most,
composed of digits, English letters and under dashes only.
admin | operator | power_user | user —— Access level. “admin” means that
you can edit, modify and view all the settings of different functions. “operator”
means that you can edit, modify and view most of the settings of different
functions. “power-user” means that you can edit, modify and view some of
the settings of different functions. “user” means that you can only view some
of the settings of different functions without the right to edit or modify. It is
“admin” by default. For more details about privilege restrictions, please refer
to the Privilege Requirement part in each command.
0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password
will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.
password
—— Users’ login password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric
characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English
letters (case sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters
( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ).
7 —— Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow.
encrypted-password
—— A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length,
which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the
70
encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding
unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global
encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the
password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric
encrypted form.
Example
Add and enable a new admin user named “tplink”, of which the password is
“admin” and unencrypted:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#user name tplink privilege admin password 0
admin
11.2 user name (secret)
Description
The user name command is used to add a new user or modify the existed
users’ information. To delete the existed users, please use no user name
command. This command uses the MD5 encryption.
Syntax
user name
name
[ privilege admin | operator | power_user | user ] secret { [ 0 ]
password
| 5
encrypted-password
}
no user name
name
Parameter
name
——Type a name for users' login, which contains 16 characters at most,
composed of digits, English letters and under dashes only.
admin | operator | power_user | user —— Access level. “admin” means that
you can edit, modify and view all the settings of different functions. “operator”
means that you can edit, modify and view most of the the settings of different
71
functions. “power-user” means that you can edit, modify and view some of
the the settings of different functions. “user” means that you can only view
some of the the settings of different functions without the right to edit or
modify. It is “admin” by default.
0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password
will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.
password
——Users’ login password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric
characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English
letters (case sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters
( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ). The password will be saved to the configuration file using the
MD5 encrypted algorithm.
5 —— Indicates an MD5 encrypted password with fixed length will follow.
encrypted-password
—— An MD5 encrypted password with fixed length,
which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
If both the user name (password) and user name (secret) are defined, only
the latest configured password will take effect.
Example
Add and enable a new admin user named “tplink”, of which the password is
“admin”. The password will be displayed in the encrypted form.
T2500G-10MPS(config)#user name tplink privilege admin secret 0 admin
11.3 service password-recovery
Description
The service password-recovery command is used to enable the
password-recovery feature. To disable the password-recovery feature,
please use no service password-recovery command.
With password-recovery enabled, you can connect to the switch’s concole
port and delete all your previous set accounts. You can use the default
72
username and password (which are both admin) to login the switch after its
startup. For more details about password recovery procedure, please refer to
Appendix A in the User Guide.
Syntax
service password-recovery
no service password-recovery
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the switch’s password recovery feature:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# service password-recovery
11.4 user access-control ip-based
Description
The user access-control ip-based command is used to limit the IP-range of
the users for login. Only the users within the IP-range you set here are
allowed to login. To cancel the user access limit, please use no user
access-control command.
Syntax
user access-control ip-based {
ip-addr ip-mask
}
[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ]
[ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ]
no user access-control [ ip-based index
id
]
Parameter
ip-addr
—— The source IP address. Only the users within the IP-range you
set here are allowed for login. 5 IP-based entries can be configured at most.
ip-mask
—— The subnet mask of the IP address.
[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] —— Specify the access
interface. These interfaces are enabled by default.
id
—— Delete the specified IP-based entry. The index ranges from 1 to 5.
73
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the access-control of the user whose IP address is 192.168.0.148:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# user access-control ip-based 192.168.0.148
255.255.255.255
11.5 user access-control mac-based
Description
The user access-control mac-based command is used to limit the MAC
address of the users for login. Only the user with this MAC address you set
here is allowed to login. To cancel the user access limit, please use no user
access-control command.
Syntax
user access-control mac-based {
mac-addr
}
[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ]
[ https ] [ ping ] [ all ]
no user access-control
Parameter
mac-addr
—— The source MAC address. Only the user with this MAC
address is allowed to login.
[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] —— Specify the access
interface. These interfaces are enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure that only the user whose MAC address is 00:00:13:0A:00:01 is
allowed to login:
74
T2500G-10MPS(config)# user access-control mac-based
00:00:13:0A:00:01
11.6 user access-control port-based
Description
The user access-control port-based command is used to limit the ports for
login. Only the users connected to these ports you set here are allowed to
login. To cancel the user access limit, please use no user access-control
command.
Syntax
user access-control port-based interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
} [ snmp ]
[ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ]
no user access-control
Parameter
port-list
——The list group of Ethernet ports, in the format of 1/0/1-4. You can
appoint 5 ports at most.
[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] —— Specify the access
interface. These interfaces are enabled by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure that only the users connected to ports 2-6 are allowed to login:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# user access-control port-based interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6
75
11.7 line
Description
The line command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode and make
related configurations for the desired user(s), including the login mode and
password configurations.
Syntax
line { console
linenum
| vty
startlinenum endlinenum
| ssh | telnet }
Parameter
linenum
—— The number of users allowed to login through console port. Its
value is 0 in general, for the reason that console input is only active on one
console port at a time.
startlinenum
——The start serial number of the login user selected to
configure the login mode and password, ranging from 0 to 15. 0 means the
first login user number, 1 means the second, and the rest can be done on the
same manner.
endlinenum
—— The end serial number of the login user selected to
configure the login mode and password, ranging from 0 to 15. 0 means the
first login user number, 1 means the second, and the rest can be done on the
same manner.
ssh —— Configure the SSH terminal line.
telnet
—— Configure the Telnet terminal line.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enter the Console port configuration mode and configure the console port 0:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line console 0
Enter the Virtual Terminal configuration mode so as to prepare further
configurations such as password and login mode for virtual terminal 0 to 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line vty 0 5
76
11.8 password
Description
The password command is used to configure the connection password. To
clear the password, please use no password command.
Syntax
password
{ [ 0 ]
password
| 7
encrypted-password
}
no password
Parameter
0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password
will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.
password
—— Connection password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric
characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows spaces but
ignores leading spaces, and cannot contain question marks. By default, it is
empty.
7 —— Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow.
encrypted-password
—— A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length,
which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the
encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding
unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global
encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the
password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric
encrypted form.
Example
Configure the connection password of Console port connection 0 as “tplink”
and unencrypted:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line console 0
77
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)#password 0 tplink
Configure the connection password of virtual terminal connection 0-5 as
“tplink” and unencrypted:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line vty 0 5
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)#password 0 tplink
11.9 login
Description
The login command is used to configure the login mode of a switch which
uses connection password to login. At this situation, a connection password
must be set for virtual terminal connection.
Syntax
login
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the login of Console port connection 0 as login mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line console 0
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)#login
Configure the login of virtual terminal connection 0-5 as login mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line vty 0 5
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)#login
11.10 login local
Description
The login local command is used to configure the login mode of the switch
which uses the user name and password to login.
78
Syntax
login local
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the login of virtual terminal connection 0-5 as login local mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line vty 0 5
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)#login local
Configure the login of Console port connection 0 as login local mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line console 0
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)#login local
11.11 media-type rj45
Description
The media-type rj45 command is used to configure the console media type
as RJ-45 for input. The switch has two console ports available —— an RJ-45
console port and a micro-USB console port. Console input is active on only
one console port at a time. By default, the micro-USB connector takes
precedence over the RJ-45 connector, which means that, when both the
RJ-45 console connection and micro-USB console connection are valid,
input from the RJ-45 console is disabled, and input from the micro-USB
console is enabled. To return to the default configuration, please use no
media-type rj45 command.
Syntax
media-type rj45
no media-type rj45
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
79
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the RJ-45 console input:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# line console 0
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)# media-type rj45
Receive the micro-USB console input prior to the RJ-45 console input:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# line console 0
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)# no media-type rj45
11.12 telnet
Description
The telnet enable command is used to enable the Telnet function. To disable
the Telnet function, please use the telnet disable command. This function is
enabled by default.
Syntax
telnet enable
telnet disable
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Disable the Telnet function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# telnet disable
11.13 serial_port baud-rate
Description
The serial_port baud-rate command is used to configure the communication
baud rate on the console port. To return to the default baud rate, please use
no serial_port command.
80
Syntax
serial_port baud-rate { 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 }
no serial_port
Parameter
9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 ——Specify the communication baud
rate on the console port. The default baul rate is 38400 bps.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the communication baud rate on the console port to the default
value:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# no serial_port
11.14 show password-recovery
Description
The show password-recovery command is used to display the status of the
password-recovery feature.
Syntax
show password-recovery
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the status of the password-recovery feature:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show password-recovery
81
11.15 show user account-list
Description
The show user account-list command is used to display the information of
the current users.
Syntax
show user account-list
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of the current users:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show user account-list
11.16 show user configuration
Description
The show user configuration command is used to display the security
configuration information of the users, including access-control, max-number
and the idle-timeout, etc.
Syntax
show user configuration
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the security configuration information of the users:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show user configuration
82
11.17 show telnet-status
Description
The show telnet-status command is used to display the configuration
information of the Telnet function.
Syntax
show telnet-status
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display whether the Telnet function is enabled:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show telnet-status
83
Chapter 12 HTTP and HTTPS Commands
With the help of HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) or HTTPS (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
over Secure Socket Layer), you can manage the switch through a standard browser.
HTTP is the protocol to exchange or transfer hypertext.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), a security protocol, is to provide a secure connection for the
application layer protocol (e.g. HTTP) based on TCP. Adopting asymmetrical encryption
technology, SSL uses key pair to encrypt/decrypt information. A key pair refers to a public key
(contained in the certificate) and its corresponding private key. By default the switch has a
certificate (self-signed certificate) and a corresponding private key. The Certificate/Key
Download function enables the user to replace the default key pair.
12.1 ip http server
Description
The ip http server command is used to enable the HTTP server within the
switch. To disable the HTTP function, please use no ip http server command.
This function is enabled by default. The HTTP and HTTPS server function
cannot be disabled at the same time.
Syntax
ip http server
no ip http server
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Disable the HTTP function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# no ip http server
84
12.2 ip http max-users
Description
The ip http max-users command is used to configure the maximum number
of users that are allowed to connect to the HTTP server. To cancel this
limitation, please use no ip http max-users command.
Syntax
ip http max-users
admin-num operator-num poweruser-num user-num
no ip http max-users
Parameter
admin-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP
server as Admin, ranging from 1 to 16. The total number of users should be
no more than 16.
operator-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the
HTTP server as Operator, ranging from 0 to 15.The total number of users
should be less than 16.
poweruser-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the
HTTP server as Power User, ranging from 0 to 15.The total number of users
should be less than 16.
user-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP
server as User, ranging from 0 to 15.The total number of users should be less
than 16.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the maximum number of the Admin, Operator, Power User and
User users logging on to the HTTP server as 5, 3, 2 and 3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http max-users 5 3 2 3
85
12.3 ip http session timeout
Description
The ip http session timeout command is used to configure the connection
timeout of the HTTP server. To restore to the default timeout time, please use
no ip http session timeout command.
Syntax
ip http session timeout
time
no ip http session timeout
Parameter
time
——The timeout time, ranging from 5 to 30 in minutes. By default, the
value is 10.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the timeout time of the HTTP connection as 15 minutes:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http session timeout 15
12.4 ip http secure-server
Description
The ip http secure-server command is used to enable the HTTPS server
within the switch. To disable the HTTPS function, please use no ip http
secure-server command. This function is enabled by default. The HTTP and
HTTPS server function cannot be disabled at the same time.
Syntax
ip http secure-server
no ip http secure-server
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
86
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Disable the HTTP function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# no ip http secure-server
12.5 ip http secure-protocol
Description
The ip http secure-protocol command is used to configure the SSL protocol
version. To restore to the default SSL version, please use no ip http
secure-protocol command. By default, the switch supports SSLv3 and
TLSv1.
Syntax
ip http secure-protocol
{ [ ssl3 ] [ tls1 ] }
no ip http session
Parameter
ssl3
—— The SSL 3.0 protocol.
tls1
—— The TLS 1.0 protocol
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the protocol of SSL connection as SSL 3.0:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http secure-protocol ssl3
87
12.6 ip http secure-ciphersuite
Description
The ip http secure-ciphersuite command is used to configure the
cipherSuites over the SSL connection supported by the switch. To restore to
the default ciphersuite types, please use no ip http secure-ciphersuite
command.
Syntax
ip http secure-ciphersuite
{ [ 3des-ede-cbc-sha ] [ rc4-128-md5 ]
[ rc4-128-sha ] [ des-cbc-sha ] }
no ip http secure-ciphersuite
Parameter
[ 3des-ede-cbc-sha ] [ rc4-128-md5 ] [ rc4-128-sha ] [ des-cbc-sha ]
——
Specify the encryption algorithm and the digest algorithm to use on an SSL
connection. By default, the switch supports all these ciphersuites.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the ciphersuite to be used for encryption over the SSL connection
as 3des-ede-cbc-sha:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http secure-ciphersuite 3des-ede-cbc-sha
12.7 ip http secure-max-users
Description
The ip http secure-max-users command is used to configure the maximum
number of users that are allowed to connect to the HTTPs server. To cancel
this limitation, please use no ip http secure-max-users command.
Syntax
ip http secure-max-users
admin-num guest-num
88
no ip secure-max-users
Parameter
admin-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTPs
server as Admin, ranging from 1 to 16. The total number of Admin and Guest
should be less than 16.
guest-num
—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTPs
server as Guest, ranging from 0 to 15.The total number of Admin and Guest
should be less than 16.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the maximum number of the Admin and Guest users logging on to
the HTTPs server as 5 and 3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http secure-max-users 5 3
12.8 ip http secure-session timeout
Description
The ip http secure-session timeout command is used to configure the
connection timeout of the HTTPS server. To restore to the default timeout
time, please use no ip http secure-session timeout command.
Syntax
ip http secure-session timeout
time
no ip http secure-session timeout
Parameter
time
—— The timeout time, ranging from 5 to 30 in minutes. By default, the
value is 10.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
89
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the timeout time of the HTTPs connection as 15 minutes:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http secure-session timeout 15
12.9 ip http secure-server download certificate
Description
The ip http secure-server download certificate command is used to
download a certificate to the switch from TFTP server.
Syntax
ip http secure-server download certificate
ssl-cert
ip-address
ip-addr
Parameter
ssl-cert
—— The name of the SSL certificate which is selected to download
to the switch. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The
Certificate must be BASE64 encoded.
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Download an SSL Certificate named ssl-cert from TFTP server with the IP
address of 192.168.0.146:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http secure-server download certificate
ssl-cert ip-address 192.168.0.146
Download an SSL Certificate named ssl-cert from TFTP server with the IP
address of fe80::1234
90
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http secure-server download certificate
ssl-cert ip-address fe80::1234
12.10 ip http secure-server download key
Description
The ip http secure-server download key command is used to download an
SSL key to the switch from TFTP server.
Syntax
ip http secure-server download key
ssl-key
ip-address
ip-addr
Parameter
ssl-key
—— The name of the SSL key which is selected to download to the
switch. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The Key must
be BASE64 encoded.
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Download an SSL key named ssl-key from TFTP server with the IP address of
192.168.0.146:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http secure-server download key ssl-key
ip-address 192.168.0.146
Download an SSL key named ssl-key from TFTP server with the IP address of
fe80::1234
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http secure-server download key ssl-key
ip-address fe80::1234
91
12.11 show ip http configuration
Description
The show ip http configuration command is used to display the
configuration information of the HTTP server, including status, session
timeout, access-control, max-user number and the idle-timeout, etc.
Syntax
show ip http configuration
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration information of the HTTP server:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ip http configuration
12.12 show ip http secure-server
Description
The show ip http secure-server command is used to display the global
configuration of SSL.
Syntax
show ip http secure-server
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of SSL:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ip http secure-server
92
Chapter 13 Binding Table Commands
You can bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host
together, which can be the condition for the ARP Inspection and IP verify source to filter the
packets.
13.1 ip source binding
Description
The ip source binding command is used to bind the IP address, MAC address,
VLAN ID and the Port number together manually. You can manually bind the
IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together in the
condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN.
To delete the IP-MAC–VID-PORT entry from the binding table, please use no
ip source binding index command.
Syntax
ip source binding
hostname ip-addr mac-addr
vlan
vlan-id
interface
gigabitEthernet
port
{ none | arp-detection | ip-verify-source | both }
[ forced-source { arp-scanning | dhcp-snooping } ]
no ip source binding index
idx
Parameter
hostname
——The Host Name, which contains 20 characters at most.
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the Host.
mac-addr
—— The MAC address of the Host.
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID needed to be bound, ranging from 1 to 4094.
port
—— The number of port connected to the Host.
none | arp-detection | ip-verify-source | both ——The protect type for the
entry. “arp-detection” indicates ARP detection; “ip-verify-source” indicates IP
source filter; “none” indicates applying none; “both” indicates applying both.
forced-source —— The source of the binding entry can be specified as
“arp-scanning” or “dhcp-snooping”. It is multi-optional.
idx
—— The entry number needed to be deleted. You can use the show ip
source binding command to get the idx. Pay attention that the entry number
93
is the actual number in the binding table which is not display in an arranged
order.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind an ACL entry with the IP 192.168.0.1, MAC 00:00:00:00:00:01, VLAN ID 2
and the Port number 5 manually. And then enable the entry for the ARP
detection:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ip source binding host1 192.168.0.1
00:00:00:00:00:01 vlan 2 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 arp-detection
Delete the IP-MAC–VID-PORT entry with the index 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#no ip source binding index 5
13.2 ip dhcp snooping
Description
The ip dhcp snooping command is used to enable DHCP Snooping function
globally. To disable DHCP Snooping function globally, please use no ip dhcp
snooping command. DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the process of the
Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server, and record the IP address,
MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for
automatic binding. The switch can also propagate the control information and
the network parameters via the Option 82 field to provide more information
for the Host.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping
no ip dhcp snooping
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
94
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP Snooping function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ip dhcp snooping
13.3 ip dhcp snooping vlan
Description
The ip dhcp snooping vlan command is used to enable DHCP Snooping
function on a specified VLAN. To disable DHCP Snooping function on this
VLAN, please use no ip dhcp snooping vlan command.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping vlan
vlan-range
no ip dhcp snooping vlan
vlan-range
Parameter
vlan-range
—— Specify the VLANs to enable the DHCP snooping function, in
the format of 1-3, 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP Snooping function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ip dhcp snooping vlan 1,4,6-7
95
13.4 ip dhcp snooping information option
Description
The ip dhcp snooping information option command is used to enable the
Option 82 function of DHCP Snooping. To disable the Option 82 function,
please use no ip dhcp snooping information option command.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping information option
no ip dhcp snooping information option
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Option 82 function of DHCP Snooping on port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping information option
13.5 ip dhcp snooping information strategy
Description
The ip dhcp snooping information strategy command is used to select the
operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host.
To restore to the default option, please use no ip dhcp snooping information
strategy command.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping information strategy
strategy
no ip dhcp snooping information strategy
96
Parameter
strategy
—— The operations for Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets
from the Host, including three types:
keep: Indicates to keep the Option 82 field of the packets. It is the default
option;
replace: Indicates to replace the Option 82 field of the packets with the
switch defined one;
drop: Indicates to discard the packets including the Option 82 field
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Replace the Option 82 field of the packets with the switch defined one and
then send out on port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping information strategy replace
13.6 ip dhcp snooping information remote-id
Description
The ip dhcp snooping information remote-id command is used to configure
the customized sub-option Remote ID for the Option 82. To return to default
Remote ID for the Option 82, please use no ip dhcp snooping information
remote-id command.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping information remote-id
string
no ip dhcp snooping information remote-id
Parameter
string
—— Enter the sub-option Remote ID, which contains 64 characters at
most.
97
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the customized sub-option Remote ID for the Option 82 as tplink
on port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping information remote-id tplink
13.7 ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id
Description
The ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id command is used to enable and
configure the customized sub-option Circuit ID for the Option 82 on a
specified port/port channel. To return to the default Circuit ID for the Option
82, please use no ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id command.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id
string
no ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id
Parameter
string
—— Enter the sub-option Circuit ID, which contains 64 characters at
most.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
98
Example
Enable and configure the customized sub-option Circuit ID for the Option 82
as “tplink” on port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id tplink
13.8 ip dhcp snooping trust
Description
The ip dhcp snooping trust command is used to configure a port to be a
Trusted Port. Only the Trusted Port can receive the DHCP packets from
DHCP servers. To turn the port back to a distrusted port, please use no ip
dhcp snooping trust command.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping trust
no ip dhcp snooping trust
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2 to be a Trusted Port:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping trust
13.9 ip dhcp snooping mac-verify
Description
The ip dhcp snooping mac-verify command is used to enable the MAC
Verify feature. To disable the MAC Verify feature, please use no ip dhcp
snooping mac-verify command. There are two fields of the DHCP packet
99
containing the MAC address of the Host. The MAC Verify feature is to
compare the two fields and discard the packet if the two fields are different.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping mac-verify
no ip dhcp snooping mac-verify
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the MAC Verify feature for the Gigabit Ethernet port 10/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping mac-verify
13.10 ip dhcp snooping limit rate
Description
The ip dhcp snooping limit rate command is used to enable the Flow Control
feature for the DHCP packets. The excessive DHCP packets will be discarded.
To restore to the default configuration, please use no ip dhcp snooping limit
rate command.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping limit rate
value
no ip dhcp snooping limit rate
Parameter
value
—— The value of Flow Control. The options are 5/10/15/20/25/30
(packet/second). The default value is 0, which stands for “disable”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
100
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Set the Flow Control of GigabitEthernet port 2 as 20 pps:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping limit rate 20
13.11 ip dhcp snooping decline rate
Description
The ip dhcp snooping decline rate command is used to enable the Decline
Protect feature and configure the rate limit on DHCP Decine packets. The
excessive DHCP Decline packets will be discarded. To disable the Decline
Protect feature, please use no ip dhcp snooping decline rate command.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping decline rate
value
no ip dhcp snooping decline rate
Parameter
value
—— Specify the rate limit of DHCP Decline packets, and the optional
values are 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 (units:packet/second). It default value is
0, which stands for “disable”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the rate limit of DHCP Decline packets as 20 packets per second
on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
101
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping decline 20
13.12 show ip source binding
Description
The show ip source binding command is used to display the IP-MAC-VID-
PORT binding table.
Syntax
show ip source binding
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IP-MAC-VID-PORT binding table:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip source binding
13.13 show ip dhcp snooping
Description
The show ip dhcp snooping command is used to display the running status
of DHCP Snooping.
Syntax
show ip dhcp snooping
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the running status of DHCP Snooping:
T2500G-10MPS#show ip dhcp snooping
102
13.14 show ip dhcp snooping interface
Description
The show ip dhcp snooping interface command is used to display the DHCP
Snooping configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of
all Ethernet ports/port channels.
Syntax
show ip dhcp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the DHCP Snooping configuration of all Ethernet ports and port
channels:
T2500G-10MPS#show ip dhcp snooping interface
Display the DHCP Snooping configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5:
T2500G-10MPS#show ip dhcp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
13.15 show ip dhcp snooping information interface
Description
The show ip dhcp snooping information interface command is used to
display the DHCP snooping option 82 configuration of a desired Gigabit
Ethernet port/port channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels.
Syntax
show ip dhcp snooping information interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
|
port-channel
port-channel-id
]
103
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the DHCP snooping option 82 configuration of all Ethernet ports and
port channels:
T2500G-10MPS#show ip dhcp snooping information interface
Display the DHCP snooping option 82 configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port
1/0/5:
T2500G-10MPS#show ip dhcp snooping information interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
104
Chapter 14 ARP Inspection Commands
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) Detect function is to protect the switch from the ARP
cheating, such as the Network Gateway Spoofing and Man-In-The-Middle Attack, etc.
14.1 ip arp inspection(global)
Description
The ip arp inspection command is used to enable the ARP Detection
function globally. To disable the ARP Detection function, please use no ip arp
detection command.
Syntax
ip arp inspection
no ip arp inspection
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the ARP Detection function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ip arp inspection
14.2 ip arp inspection trust
Description
The ip arp inspection trust command is used to configure the port for which
the ARP Detect function is unnecessary as the Trusted Port. To clear the
Trusted Port list, please use no ip arp detection trust command .The specific
ports, such as up-linked port and routing port and LAG port, should be set as
Trusted Port. To ensure the normal communication of the switch, please
configure the ARP Trusted Port before enabling the ARP Detect function.
105
Syntax
ip arp inspection trust
no ip arp inspection trust
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-5 as the Trusted Port:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)#ip arp inspection trust
14.3 ip arp inspection(interface)
Description
The ip arp inspection command is used to enable the ARP Defend function.
To disable the ARP detection function, please use no ip arp inspection
command. ARP Attack flood produces lots of ARP Packets, which will occupy
the bandwidth and slow the network speed extremely. With the ARP Defend
enabled, the switch can terminate receiving the ARP packets for 300 seconds
when the transmission speed of the legal ARP packet on the port exceeds the
defined value so as to avoid ARP Attack flood.
Syntax
ip arp inspection
no ip arp inspection
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
106
Example
Enable the arp defend function for the Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-6:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)#ip arp inspection
14.4 ip arp inspection limit-rate
Description
The ip arp inspection limit-rate command is used to configure the ARP
speed of a specified port. To restore to the default speed, please use no ip
arp inspection limit-rate command.
Syntax
ip arp inspection limit-rate
value
no ip arp inspection limit-rate
Parameter
value
——The value to specify the maximum amount of the received ARP
packets per second, ranging from 10 to 100 in pps(packet/second). By
default, the value is 15.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the maximum amount of the received ARP packets per second as
50 pps for Gigabit Ethernet port 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ip arp inspection limit-rate 50
107
14.5 ip arp inspection recover
Description
The ip arp inspection recover command is used to restore a port to the ARP
transmit status from the ARP filter status.
Syntax
ip arp inspection recover
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Restore Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5 to the ARP transmit status:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ip arp inspection recover
14.6 show ip arp inspection
Description
The show ip arp inspection command is used to display the ARP detection
global configuration including the enable/disable status and the Trusted Port
list.
Syntax
show ip arp inspection
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
108
Example
Display the ARP detection configuration globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip arp inspection
14.7 show ip arp inspection interface
Description
The show ip arp inspection interface command is used to display the
interface configuration of ARP detection.
Syntax
show ip arp inspection interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
——The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip arp inspection interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/1
Display the configuration of all Ethernet ports:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip arp inspection interface
14.8 show ip arp inspection statistics
Description
The show ip arp inspection statistics command is used to display the
number of the illegal ARP packets received.
Syntax
show ip arp inspection statistics
109
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the number of the illegal ARP packets received:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip arp inspection statistics
14.9 clear ip arp inspection statistics
Description
The clear ip arp inspection statistics command is used to clear the statistic
of the illegal ARP packets received.
Syntax
clear ip arp inspection statistics
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear the statistic of the illegal ARP packets received:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#clear ip arp inspection statistics
110
Chapter 15 DoS Defend Commands
DoS (Denial of Service) Attack is to occupy the network bandwidth maliciously by the network
attackers or the evil programs sending a lot of service requests to the Host. With the DoS
Defend enabled, the switch can analyze the specific field of the received packets and provide
the defend measures to ensure the normal working of the local network.
15.1 ip dos-prevent
Description
The ip dos-prevent command is used to enable the DoS defend function
globally. To disable the DoS defend function, please use no ip dos-prevent
command.
Syntax
ip dos-prevent
no ip dos-prevent
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DoS defend function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ip dos-prevent
15.2 ip dos-prevent type
Description
The ip dos-prevent type command is used to select the DoS Defend Type.
To disable the corresponding Defend Type, please use no ip dos-prevent
type command.
111
Syntax
ip dos-prevent type { land | scan-synfin | xma-scan | null-scan |
port-less-1024 | blat | ping-flood | syn-flood | win-nuke | smurf |
ping-of-death }
no ip dos-prevent type { land | scan-synfin | xma-scan | null-scan |
port-less-1024 | blat | ping-flood | syn-flood | win-nuke | smurf |
ping-of-death }
Parameter
land ——The attacker sends a specific fake SYN (synchronous) packet to the
destination host. Because both of the source IP address and the destination
IP address of the SYN packet are set to be the IP address of the host, the
host will be trapped in an endless circle of building the initial connection.
scan-synfin ——The attacker sends the packet with its SYN field and the FIN
field set to 1. The SYN field is used to request initial connection whereas the
FIN field is used to request disconnection. Therefore, the packet of this type
is illegal.
xma-scan ——The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index, FIN,
URG and PSH field set to 1.
null-scan ——The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index and all
the control fields set to 0. During the TCP connection and data transmission,
the packets with all control fields set to 0 are considered illegal.
port-less-1024 ——The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP SYN
field set to 1 and source port smaller than 1024.
blat ——The attacker sends the illegal packet with the same source port and
destination port on Layer 4 and with its URG field set to 1. Similar to the Land
Attack, the system performance of the attacked host is reduced because the
Host circularly attempts to build a connection with the attacker.
ping-flood ——The attacker floods the destination system with Ping packets,
creating a broadcast storm that makes it impossible for the system to
respond to legal communication.
syn-flood ——The attacker uses a fake IP address to send TCP request
packets to the server. Upon receiving the request packets, the server
responds with SYN-ACK packets. Since the IP address is fake, no response
will be returned. The server will keep on sending SYN-ACK packets. If the
attacker sends overflowing fake request packets, the network resource will
be occupied maliciously and the requests of the legal clients will be denied.
win-nuke ——Because the Operation System with bugs cannot correctly
process the URG (Urgent Pointer) of TCP packets, the attacker sends this
type of packets to the TCP port139 (NetBIOS) of the host with the Operation
112
System bugs, which will cause the host with a blue screen
smurf —— The attacker broadcasts large numbers of Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMP) packets with the intended victim’s spoofed source
IP to a computer network using an IP broadcast address. Most devices on a
network will respond to this by sending a reply to the source IP address. If the
number of devices on the network that receive and respond to these packets
is very large, the victim’s host will be flooded with traffic, which can slow down
the victim’s host and cause the host impossible to work on.
ping-of-death —— The attacker sends an improperly large Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request packet, or a ping packet, with the
purpose of overflowing the input buffers of the destination host and causing
the host to crash.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DoS Defend Type named Land attack:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ip dos-prevent type land
15.3 show ip dos-prevent
Description
The show ip dos-prevent command is used to display the DoS information of
the detected DoS attack, including enable/disable status, the DoS Defend
Type, the count of the attack, etc.
Syntax
show ip dos-prevent
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
113
Example
Display the DoS information of the detected DoS attack globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip dos-prevent
114
Chapter 16 IEEE 802.1X Commands
IEEE 802.1X function is to provide an access control for LAN ports via the authentication. An
802.1X system include three entities: supplicant, authenticator and authentication server.
Supplicant: the device that requests access to the LAN.
Authentication server: performs the actual authentication of the supplicant. It validates the
identity of the supplicant and notifies the authenticator whether or not the supplicant is
authorized to access the LAN.
Authenticator: controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication
status of the supplicant. It is usually an 802.1X-supported network device, such as this
TP-Link switch. It acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the supplicant and the
authentication server, requesting identity information from the supplicant, verifying that
information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the supplicant.
This chapter handles with the authentication process between the supplicant and the switch.
To realize the authentication and accounting function, you should also enbable the AAA
function and configure the RADIUS server. Go to Chapter 44 AAA Commands for more details.
16.1 dot1x system-auth-control
Description
The dot1x system-auth-control command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1X
function globally. To disable the IEEE 802.1X function, please use no dot1x
system-auth-control command.
Syntax
dot1x system-auth-control
no dot1x system-auth-control
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IEEE 802.1X function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#dot1x system-auth-control
115
16.2 dot1x handshake
Description
The dot1x handshake command is used enable the handshake feature. The
handshake feature is used to detect the connection status between the
TP-Link 802.1x supplicant and the switch. Please disable the handshake
feature if you are using a non-TP-Link 802.1x-compliant client software. This
feature is enabled by default.
Syntax
dot1x handshake
no dot1x handshake
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Disable the 802.1X handshake function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# no dot1x handshake
16.3 dot1x auth-method
Description
The dot1x auth-method command is used to configure the Authentication
Method of IEEE 802.1X and the default 802.1x authentication method is “eap”.
To restore to the default 802.1x authentication method, please use no dot1x
auth-method command.
Syntax
dot1x auth-method { pap | eap }
no dot1x auth-method
Parameter
pap | eap ——Authentication Methods.
116
pap: EAP termination mode. IEEE 802.1X authentication system uses
extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange information between
the switch and the client. The EAP packets are terminated at the switch and
repackaged in the Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) packets, and then
transferred to the RADIUS server.
eap: EAP relay mode. IEEE 802.1X authentication system uses extensible
authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange information between the switch
and the client. The EAP protocol packets with authentication data are
encapsulated in the advanced protocol (such as RADIUS) packets and
transmitted to the authentication server.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Authentication Method of IEEE 802.1X as “pap”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#dot1x auth-method pap
16.4 dot1x accounting
Description
The dot1x accounting command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1X
accounting function globally. To disable the IEEE 802.1X accounting function,
please use no dot1x accounting command.
Syntax
dot1x accounting
no dot1x accounting
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
117
Example
Enable the enable the IEEE 802.1X accounting function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#dot1x accounting
16.5 dot1x guest-vlan(global)
Description
The dot1x guest-vlan command is used to enable the Guest VLAN function
globally. To disable the Guest VLAN function, please use no dot1x
guest-vlan command.
Syntax
dot1x guest-vlan
vid
no dot1x guest-vlan
Parameter
vid
—— The VLAN ID needed to enable the Guest VLAN function, ranging
from 2 to 4094. The supplicants in the Guest VLAN can access the specified
network source.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Guest VLAN function for VLAN 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#dot1x guest-vlan 5
16.6 dot1x quiet-period
Description
The dot1x quiet-period command is used to enable the quiet-period function.
To disable the function, please use no dot1x quiet-period command.
118
Syntax
dot1x quiet-period [
time
]
no dot1x quiet-period
Parameter
time
—— The length of the quiet-period time. If one user’s authentication fails,
its subsequent IEEE 802.1x authentication requests will not be processed
during the quiet-period time. It ranges from 1 to 999 seconds and the default
value is 10 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the quiet-period function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#dot1x quiet-period
Enable the quiet-period function and set the quiet-period as 5 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#dot1x quiet-period 5
16.7 dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout
Description
The dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout command is used to configure the
supplicant timeout. To restore to the default, please use no dot1x timeout
supplicant-timeout command.
Syntax
dot1x timeout
supplicant-timeout
time
no dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout
Parameter
time
——The maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from
supplicant before resending a request to the supplicant., ranging from 1 to 9
in second. By default, it is 3 seconds.
119
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the supplicant timeout value as 5 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout 5
16.8 dot1x max-reauth-req
Description
The dot1x max-reauth-req command is used to configure the maximum
transfer times of the repeated authentication request when the server cannot
be connected. To restore to the default value, please use no dot1x
max-reauth-req command.
Syntax
dot1x max-reauth-req
times
no dot1x max-reauth-req
Parameter
times
—— The maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication
request, ranging from 1 to 9 in times. By default, the value is 3.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication
request as 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#dot1x max-reauth-req 5
120
16.9 dot1x
Description
The dot1x command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1X function for a
specified port. To disable the IEEE 802.1X function for a specified port, please
use no dot1x command.
Syntax
dot1x
no dot1x
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet )
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IEEE 802.1X function for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#dot1x
16.10 dot1x guest-vlan(interface)
Description
The dot1x guest-vlan command is used to enable the guest VLAN function
for a specified port. To disable the Guest VLAN function for a specified port,
please use no dot1x guest-vlan command. Please ensure that the Control
Type of the corresponding port is port-based before enabling the guest
VLAN function for it.
Syntax
dot1x guest-vlan
no dot1x guest-vlan
121
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Guest VLAN function for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#dot1x guest-vlan
16.11 dot1x port-control
Description
The dot1x port-control command is used to configure the Control Mode of
IEEE 802.1X for the specified port. By default, the control mode is “auto”. To
restore to the default configuration, please use no dot1x port-control
command.
Syntax
dot1x port-control {auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force}
no dot1x port-control
Parameter
auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force —— The Control Mode for the
port.
auto: In this mode, the port will normally work only after passing the 802.1X
Authentication.
authorized-force: In this mode, the port can work normally without passing
the 802.1X Authentication.
unauthorized-force: In this mode, the port is forbidden working for its fixed
unauthorized status.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
122
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Control Mode for Gigabit Ethernet port 20 as
“authorized-force”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#dot1x port-control authorized-force
16.12 dot1x port-method
Description
The dot1x port-method command is used to configure the control type of
IEEE 802.1X for the specified port. By default, the control type is “mac-based”.
To restore to the default configuration, please use no dot1x port-method
command.
Syntax
dot1x port-method { mac-based | port-based }
no dot1x port-method
Parameter
mac-based | port-based ——The control type for the port.
mac-based: Any client connected to the port should pass the 802.1X
authentication for access.
port-based: All the clients connected to the port can access the network on
the condition that any one of the clients has passed the 802.1X
Authentication.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
123
Example
Configure the Control Type for Gigabit Ethernet port 20 as “port-based”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#dot1x port-method port-based
16.13 show dot1x global
Description
The show dot1x global command is used to display the global configuration
of 801.X.
Syntax
show dot1x global
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of 801.X globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show dot1x global
16.14 show dot1x interface
Description
The show dot1x interface command is used to display all ports or the
specified port’s configuration information of 801.X.
Syntax
show dot1x interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number. If not specified, the information of all the
ports will be displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
124
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration information of 801.X for Gigabit Ethernet port 20:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show dot1x interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20
Display the configuration information of 801.X for all Ethernet ports:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show dot1x interface
125
Chapter 17 PPPoE ID-Insertion Commands
The PPPoE ID-Insertion feature provides a way to extract a Vendor-specific tag as an identifier
for the authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) access requests on an Ethernet
interface. When enabled, the switch attaches a tag to the PPPoE discovery packets, which is
called the PPPoE Vendor-Specific tag and it contains a unique line identifier. There are two
formats of Vendor-specific tags: Circuit-ID format and Remote-ID format. The BRAS receives
the tagged packet, decodes the tag, and uses the Circuit-ID/Remote-ID field of that tag as a
NAS-Port-ID attribute in the RADIUS server for PPP authentication and AAA (authentication,
authorization, and accounting) access requests. The switch will remove the
Circuit-ID/Remote-ID tag from the received PPPoE Active Discovery Offer and
Session-confirmation packets from the BRAS.
17.1 pppoe id-insertion(global)
Description
The pppoe id-insertion command is used to enable the PPPoE ID-Insertion
function globally. To disable the PPPoE ID-Insertion function, please use no
pppoe id-insertion command.
Syntax
pppoe id-insertion
no pppoe id-insertion
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the PPPoE ID-Insertion function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# pppoe id-insertion
126
17.2 pppoe circuit-id(interface)
Description
The pppoe circuit-id command is used to enable the PPPoE Circuit-ID
Insertion function for a specified port. To disable the PPPoE Circuit-ID
Insertion function on a specified port, please use no pppoe circuit-id
command.
Syntax
pppoe circuit-id
no pppoe circuit-id
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function for the Gigabit Ethernet port
1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS (config-if)# pppoe circuit-id
17.3 pppoe circuit-id type
Description
The pppoe circuit-id type command is used to configure the type of PPPoE
Circuit-ID for a specified port. By default, the PPPoE Circuit-ID type is “ip”.
Syntax
pppoe circuit-id type { mac | ip | udf [
Value
] | udf-only [
Value
] }
Parameter
mac | ip | udf | udf-only —— The type of PPPoE Circuit-ID for the port.
mac: The MAC address of the switch will be used to encode the Circuit-ID
option.
127
ip: The IP address of the switch will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option.
This is the default value.
udf: A user specified string with the maximum length of 40 characters will be
used to encode the Circuit-ID option.
udf-only: Only the user specified string with the maximum length of 40 will be
used to encode the Circuit-ID option.
Value
—— The value of udf/udf-only. The maximum length is 40 characters.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the type of PPPoE Circuit-ID as “mac” for the Gigabit Ethernet port
1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS (config-if)# pppoe circuit-id type mac
17.4 pppoe remote-id
Description
The pppoe remote-id command is used to enable the PPPoE Remote-ID
Insertion and configure the Remote-ID value for a specified port. To disable
the PPPoE Remote-ID Insertion function on a specified port, please use no
pppoe remote-id command. By default, the PPPoE Remote-ID Insertion is
disabled.
Syntax
pppoe remote-id [
Value
]
no pppoe remote-id
Parameter
Value
—— The value of UDF. The maximum length is 40 characters. If not
specified, the default value will be the PPPoE client’s MAC address.
128
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the remote-ID as “mac” for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS (config-if)# pppoe remote-id mac
17.5 show pppoe id-insertion global
Description
The show pppoe id-insertion global command is used to display the global
configuration of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function.
Syntax
show pppoe id-insertion global
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function globally:
T2500G-10MPS # show pppoe circuit-id global
17.6 show pppoe id-insertion interface
Description
The show pppoe id-insertion interface command is used to display all ports’
or the specified port’s configuration information of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion
function.
129
Syntax
show pppoe id-insertion interface [gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
—— The Fast/Gigabit Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration information of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function
of all Ethernet ports:
T2500G-10MPS# show pppoe id-insertion interface
Display the configuration of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function of the Gigabit
Ethernet port 1/0/1 :
T2500G-10MPS# show pppoe id-insertion interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
130
Chapter 18 System Log Commands
The log information will record the settings and operation of the switch respectively for you to
monitor operation status and diagnose malfunction.
18.1 logging buffer
Description
The logging buffer command is used to store the system log messages to an
internal buffer. To disable the log buffer function, please use the no logging
buffer command. Local Log is the system log information saved in the switch.
It has two output channels, that is, it can be saved to two different positions,
log buffer and log flash memory. The log buffer indicates the RAM for saving
system log and the information in the log buffer can be got by show logging
buffer command. It will be lost when the switch is restarted.
Syntax
logging buffer
no logging buffer
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the system log buffer:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#logging buffer
18.2 logging buffer level
Description
The logging buffer level command is used to configure the severity level and
the status of the configuration input to the log buffer. To return to the default
configuration, please use no logging buffer level command.
131
Syntax
logging buffer level
level
no logging buffer level
Parameter
level
—— Severity level of the log information output to each channel. There
are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher
priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be
output. By default, it is 6 indicating that the log information with level 0-6 will
be saved in the log buffer.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Set the severity level as 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#logging buffer level 5
18.3 logging file flash
Description
The logging file flash command is used to store the log messages in a file in
the flash on the switch. To disable the log file flash function, please use no
logging file flash command. This function is disabled by default. The log file
flash indicates the flash sector for saving system log. The information in the
log file of the flash will not be lost after the switch is restarted and can be got
by the show logging flash command.
Syntax
logging file flash
no logging file flash
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
132
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the log file flash function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#logging file flash
18.4 logging file flash frequency
Description
The logging file flash frequency command is used to specify the frequency
to synchronize the system log file in the log buffer to the flash. To resume the
default synchronizing frequency, please use the no logging file flash
frequency command.
Syntax
logging file flash frequency { periodic
periodic
| immediate }
no logging file flash frequency
Parameter
periodic
—— The frequency to synchronize the system log file in the log
buffer to the flash, ranging from 1 to 48 hours. By default, the synchronization
process takes place every 24 hours.
immediate —— The system log file in the buffer will be synchronized to the
flash immediately. This option will reduce the life of the flash and is not
recommended.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the log file synchronization frequency as 10 hours:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#logging file flash frequency periodic10
133
18.5 logging file flash level
Description
The logging file flash level command is used to specify the system log
message severity level. Messages will a severity level equal to or higher than
this value will be stored to the flash. To restore to the default level, please use
no logging file flash level command.
Syntax
logging file flash level
level
no logging file flash level
Parameter
level
—— Severity level of the log message. There are 8 severity levels
marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log
with the same or smaller severity level value will be saved to the flash. By
default, it is 3 indicating that the log message marked with 0~3 will be saved
in the log flash.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Save the log messages with their severities equal or higher than 7 to the
flash :
T2500G-10MPS(config)#logging file flash level 7
18.6 logging host index
Description
The logging host index command is used to configure the Log Host. To clear
the configuration of the specified Log Host, please use no logging host
index command. Log Host is to receive the system log from other devices.
You can remotely monitor the settings and operation status of other devices
through the log host.
134
Syntax
logging host index
idx
host-ip level
no logging host index
idx
Parameter
idx
—— The index of the log host. The switch supports 4 log hosts at most.
host-ip
—— The IP for the log host.
level
—— The severity level of the log information sent to each log host.
There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the
higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will
be sent to the corresponding log host. By default, it is 6 indicating that the log
information marked with 0~6 will be sent to the log host.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable log host 2 and set its IP address as 192.168.0.148, the level 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# logging host index 2 192.168.0.148 5
18.7 logging console
Description
The logging console command is used to send the system logs to the
console port. To disable logging to the console, please use no logging
console command. This function is enabled by default.
Syntax
logging console
no logging console
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
135
Example
Enable logging to the console port:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# logging console
18.8 logging console level
Description
The logging console level command is used to limit messages logged to the
console port. System logs no higher than the set threshold level will be
displayed on the console port. To restore the threshold level to default value,
please use no logging console level command.
Syntax
logging console level
level
no logging monitor level
Parameter
level
—— Severity level of the log information output to the console port.
There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the
higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will
be output to the terminal devices. By default, it is 5 indicating that all the log
information between level 0-5 will be output to the terminal devices.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Output the log information with severity levels between 0-7 to the console
port:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# logging console level 7
136
18.9 logging monitor
Description
The logging monitor command is used to display the system logs on the
terminal devices. To disable logging to the terminal, please use no logging
monitor command. This function is enabled by default.
Syntax
logging monitor
no logging monitor
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Disable logging to the terminal devices:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# no logging monitor
18.10 logging monitor level
Description
The logging monitor level command is used to limit messages logged to the
terminal devices. System logs no higher than the set threshold level will be
displayed on the terminal devices. To restore the threshold level to default
value, please use no logging monitor level command.
Syntax
logging monitor level
level
no logging monitor level
Parameter
level
—— Severity level of the log information output to the terminal devices.
There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the
higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will
137
be output to the terminal devices. By default, it is 5 indicating that all the log
information between level 0-5 will be output to the terminal devices.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Output the log information with severity levels between 0-7 to the terminal
devices:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# logging monitor level 7
18.11 clear logging
Description
The clear logging command is used to clear the information in the log buffer
and log file.
Syntax
clear logging [ buffer | flash ]
Parameter
buffer | flash —The output channels: buffer and flash. Clear the information of
the two channels, by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Clear the information in the log file:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# clear logging buffer
138
18.12 show logging local-config
Description
The show logging local-config command is used to display the configuration
of the Local Log output to the console, the terminal, the log buffer and the log
file.
Syntax
show logging local-config
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of the Local Log:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show logging local-config
18.13 show logging loghost
Description
The show logging loghost command is used to display the configuration of
the log host.
Syntax
show logging loghost [
index
]
Parameter
index
——The index of the log host whose configuration will be displayed,
ranging from 1 to 4. Display the configuration of all the log hosts by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
139
Example
Display the configuration of the log host 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show logging loghost 2
18.14 show logging buffer
Description
The show logging buffer command is used to display the log information in
the log buffer according to the severity level.
Syntax
show logging buffer [ level
level
]
Parameter
leve
l —— Severity level. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7.
The information of levels with priority not lower than the select level will
display. Display all the log information in the log buffer by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the log information from level 0 to level 5 in the log buffer:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show logging buffer level 5
18.15 show logging flash
Description
The show logging flash command is used to display the log information in
the log file according to the severity level.
Syntax
show logging flash [ level
level
]
140
Parameter
level
—— Severity level. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7.
The information of levels with priority not lower than the select level will
display. Display all the log information in the log file by default.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the log information with the level marked 0~3 in the log file:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show logging flash level 3
141
Chapter 19 SSH Commands
SSH (Security Shell) can provide the unsecured remote management with security and
powerful authentication to ensure the security of the management information.
19.1 ip ssh server
Description
The ip ssh server command is used to enable SSH function. To disable the
SSH function, please use no ip ssh server command.
Syntax
ip ssh server
no ip ssh server
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the SSH function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip ssh server
19.2 ip ssh version
Description
The ip ssh version command is used to enable the SSH protocol version. To
disable the protocol version, please use no ip ssh version command.
Syntax
ip ssh version { v1 | v2 }
no ip ssh version { v1 | v2 }
142
Parameter
v1 | v2
—— The SSH protocol version to be enabled. They represent SSH v1
and SSH v2 respectively.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable SSH v2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip ssh version v2
19.3 ip ssh algorithm
Description
The ip ssh algorithm command is used to configure the algorithm in SSH
function. To disable the specified algorithm, please use no ip ssh algorithm
command.
Syntax
ip ssh algorithm { AES128-CBC | AES192-CBC | AES256-CBC | Blowfish-CBC
| Cast128-CBC | 3DES-CBC | HMAC-SHA1 | HMAC-MD5 }
no ip ssh algorithm
Parameter
AES128-CBC | AES192-CBC | AES256-CBC | Blowfish-CBC | Cast128-CBC |
3DES-CBC | HMAC-SHA1 | HMAC-MD5
—— Specify the SSH algorithm.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the SSH algorithm as AES128-CBC:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip ssh algorithm AES128-CBC
143
19.4 ip ssh timeout
Description
The ip ssh timeout command is used to specify the idle-timeout time of SSH.
To restore to the factory defaults, please use ip ssh timeout command.
Syntax
ip ssh timeout
value
no ip ssh timeout
Parameter
value
—— The Idle-timeout time. During this period, the system will
automatically release the connection if there is no operation from the client. It
ranges from 1 to 120 in seconds. By default, this value is 120 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the idle-timeout time of SSH as 30 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip ssh timeout 30
19.5 ip ssh max-client
Description
The ip ssh max-client command is used to specify the maximum number of
the connections to the SSH server. To return to the default configuration,
please use no ip ssh max-client command.
Syntax
ip ssh max-client
num
no ip ssh max-client
144
Parameter
num
—— The maximum number of the connections to the SSH server. It
ranges from 1 to 5. By default, this value is 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH server as 3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip ssh max-client 3
19.6 ip ssh download
Description
The ip ssh download command is used to download the SSH key file from
TFTP server.
Syntax
ip ssh download { v1 | v2 }
key-file
ip-address
ip-addr
Parameter
v1 | v2 —— Select the type of SSH key to download, v1 represents SSH-1,
v2 represents SSH-2.
key-file
—— The name of the key-file which is selected to download. The
length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The key length of the
downloaded file must be in the range of 512 to 3072 bits.
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
145
Example
Download an SSH-1 type key file named ssh-key from TFTP server with the IP
address 192.168.0.148:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip ssh download v1 ssh-key ip-address
192.168.0.148
Download an SSH-1 type key file named ssh-key from TFTP server with the IP
address fe80::1234:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip ssh download v1 ssh-key ip-address
fe80::1234
19.7 remove public-key
Description
The remove public-key command is used to remove the SSH public key from
the switch.
Syntax
remove public-key { v1 | v2 }
Parameter
v1 | v2
—— Select the type of SSH public key, v1 represents SSH-1, v2
represents SSH-2.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Remove the SSH-1 type public key from the switch:
T2500G-10MPS# remove public-key v1
19.8 show ip ssh
Description
The show ip ssh command is used to display the global configuration of SSH.
Syntax
show ip ssh
146
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of SSH:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ip ssh
147
Chapter 20 MAC Address Commands
MAC Address configuration can improve the network security by configuring the Port Security
and maintaining the address information by managing the Address Table.
20.1 mac address-table static
Description
The mac address-table static command is used to add the static MAC
address entry. To remove the corresponding entry, please use no mac
address-table static command. The static address can be added or removed
manually, independent of the aging time. In the stable networks, the static
MAC address entries can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets
and enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding remarkably.
Syntax
mac address-table static
mac-addr
vid
vid
interface gigabitEthernet
port
no mac address-table static {
mac-addr
| vid
vid
|
mac-addr
vid
vid
|
interface gigabitEthernet
port
}
Parameter
mac-addr
——The MAC address of the entry you desire to add.
vid
—— The VLAN ID number of your desired entry. It ranges from 1 to 4094.
port
—— The Ethernet port number of your desired entry.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add a static Mac address entry to bind the MAC address 00:02:58:4f:6c:23,
VLAN1 and port 1 together:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# mac address-table static 00:02:58:4f:6c:23 vid 1
interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
148
20.2 mac address-table aging-time
Description
The mac address-table aging-time command is used to configure aging
time for the dynamic address. To return to the default configuration, please
use no mac address-table aging-time command.
Syntax
mac address-table aging-time
aging-time
no mac address-table aging-time
Parameter
aging-time
—— The aging time for the dynamic address. The value of it can
be 0 or ranges from 10 to 630 seconds. When 0 is entered, the Auto Aging
function is disabled. It is 300 by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the aging time as 500 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# mac address-table aging-time 500
20.3 mac address-table filtering
Description
The mac address-table filtering command is used to add the filtering
address entry. To delete the corresponding entry, please use no mac
address-table filtering command. The filtering address function is to forbid
the undesired package to be forwarded. The filtering address can be added
or removed manually, independent of the aging time.
Syntax
mac address-table filtering
mac-addr
vid
vid
no mac address-table filtering {[
mac-addr
] [ vid
vid
]}
Parameter
mac-addr
—— The MAC address to be filtered.
149
vid
—— The corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address. It ranges from 1 to
4094.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add a filtering address entry of which VLAN ID is 1 and MAC address is
00:1e:4b:04:01:5d:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# mac address-table filtering 00:1e:4b:04:01:5d vid
1
20.4 mac address-table notification
Description
The mac address-table notification command is used to configure global
settings of MAC address table notification.
Syntax
mac address-table notification { [ global-status enable | disable ]
[ table-full-status enable | disable ] [ interval
time
] }
Parameter
global-status enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the notification function
globally.
table-full-status enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the MAC threshold
notification. With this feature enabled, a SNMP notification is generated and
sent to the network management system (NMS) when the threshold of the
switch’s MAC address table is reached or exceeded.
interval
time
—— Specify the notification trap interval between each set of
traps that are generated to the NMS. The interval ranges from 1 to 1000
seconds and it’s 1 second by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
150
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the global MAC address notification and table full notification, specify
the notification sending interval as 2 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# mac address-table notification global-status
enable table-full-status enable interval 2
20.5 mac address-table max-mac-count
Description
The mac address-table max-mac-count command is used to configure the
Port Security. To return to the default configurations, please use no mac
address-table max-mac-count command. Port Security is to protect the
switch from the malicious MAC address attack by limiting the maximum
number of the MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. The port with
Port Security feature enabled will learned the MAC address dynamically.
When the learned MAC address number reaches the maximum, the port will
stop learning. Therefore, the other devices with the MAC address unlearned
can not access to the network via this port.
Syntax
mac address-table max-mac-count { [ max-number
num
] [ mode { dynamic |
static | permanent } ] [ status { forward | drop | disable } ] }
no mac address-table max-mac-count [ max-number | mode | status ]
Parameter
num
—— The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on
the port. It ranges from 0 to 64. By default this value is 64.
dynamic | static | permanent —— Learn mode for MAC addresses. There are
three modes, including Dynamic mode, Static mode and Permanent mode.
When Dynamic mode is selected, the learned MAC address will be deleted
automatically after the aging time. When Static mode is selected, the learned
MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be
deleted manually. The learned entries will be cleared after the switch is
rebooted. When permanent mode is selected, the learned MAC address will
be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be deleted manually too.
However, the learned entries will be saved even the switch is rebooted.
151
status —— Select the action to be taken when the number of the MAC
addresses reaches the maximum learning number on the port. By default this
function is disabled.
• forward: The packets will be forward but not be learned when learned
MAC number exceeds the the maximum MAC address number on this port.
• drop: The packets will be dropped when learned MAC number exceeds
the the maximum MAC address number on this port.
• disable: The MAC address threshold on this port is disabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable Port Security function for port 1/0/1, select Static mode as the learn
mode, and specify the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
learned on this port as 30. When the number of MAC address entries reaches
30 on this port, new entry will be dropped :
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# mac address-table max-mac-count
max-number 30 mode static status drop
20.6 mac address-table notification (interface)
Description
The mac address-table notification command is used to configure the MAC
change notification on port.
Syntax
mac address-table notification { [ learn-mode-change enable | disable ]
[ exceed-max-learned enable | disable ] [ new-mac-learned enable |
disable ] }
Parameter
learn-mode-change enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the
learn-mode-change notification. With this feature enabled, a SNMP
152
notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS)
when the learning mode of this port changes. To configure the learning mode
configuration, please refer to mac address-table max-mac-count.
exceed-max-learned enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the MAC address
threshold notification on this port. With this feature enabled, a SNMP
notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS)
when the MAC address threshold limit on this port is reached or exceeded.
To configure the port’s MAC address threshold, please refer to mac
address-table max-mac-count.
new-mac-learned enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the
new-mac-learned notification on this port. With this feature enabled, a SNMP
notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS)
when the port learns a new MAC address.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the learn-mode-change notification on port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# mac address-table notification global-status
enable
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# mac address-table notification
learn-mode-change enable
20.7 mac address-table security
Description
The mac address-table security command is used to configure security of
the MAC address table in a specified VLAN.
Syntax
mac address-table security vid
vid
max-learn
number
{ forward | drop |
disable }
153
Parameter
vid
—— Speicify the VLAN ID to configure its MAC address table.
number
—— Configure the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN. It
ranges from 0 to 16383.
forward | drop | disable
—— Choose the mode when learned MAC number
exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN.
• Drop: The packets will be dropped when learned MAC number exceeds
the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN..
• Forward: The packets will be forward but not be learned when learned
MAC number exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN..
• Disable: The threshold of the MAC address table is disabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the max learned MAC address number is VLAN 2 as 1000, and drop
the packets that have no match in the MAC address table:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# mac address-table security vid 2 max-learn 1000
drop
20.8 show mac address-table
Description
The show mac address-table command is used to display the information of
all address entries.
Syntax
show mac address-table { dynamic | static | filtering }
Parameter
dynamic | static | filtering —— The type of your desired entry. By default all
the entries are displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
154
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of all address entries:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show mac address-table
20.9 clear mac address-table
Description
The show mac address-table command is used to clear the specified
address entries.
Syntax
clear mac address-table { dynamic | static | filtering }
Parameter
dynamic | static | filtering —— The type of your desired entry.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear the information of all static address entries:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# clear mac address-table static
20.10 show mac address-table aging-time
Description
The show mac address-table aging-time command is used to display the
Aging Time of the MAC address.
Syntax
show mac address-table aging-time
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
155
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the Aging Time of the MAC address:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show mac address-table aging-time
20.11 show mac address-table max-mac-count
Description
The show mac address-table max-mac-count interface gigabitEthernet
command is used to display the security configuration of all ports or the
specified port.
Syntax
show mac address-table max-mac-count { all | interface gigabitEthernet
port
}
Parameter
all
—— Displays the security information of all the Ethernet ports.
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the security configuration of all ports:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show mac address-table max-mac-count all
Display the security configuration of port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show mac address-table max-mac-count
interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
20.12 show mac address-table interface
Description
The show mac address-table interface command is used to display the
address configuration of the specified port/port channel.
156
Syntax
show mac address-table interface { gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the address configuration of port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show mac address-table interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
20.13 show mac address-table count
Description
The show mac address-table count command is used to display the total
amount of MAC address table.
Syntax
show mac address-table count [ vlan
vlan-id
]
Parameter
vlan-
id
—— Specify the VLAN which the MAC entries belong to.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the total MAC entry information in different VLANs:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show mac address-table count
157
20.14 show mac address-table address
Description
The show mac address-table address command is used to display the
information of the specified MAC address.
Syntax
show mac address-table address
mac-addr
[ interface { gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
} | vid
vlan-id
]
Parameter
mac-addr
——The specified MAC address.
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
vlan-id
—— Specify the VLAN which the entry belongs to.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of the MAC address 00:00:00:00:23:00 in VLAN 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show mac address-table address
00:00:00:00:23:00 vid 1
20.15 show mac address-table vlan
Description
The show mac address-table vlan command is used to display the MAC
address configuration of the specified vlan.
Syntax
show mac address-table vlan
vid
Parameter
vid
——The specified VLAN id.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
158
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the MAC address configuration of vlan 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show mac address-table vlan 1
20.16 show mac address-table notification
Description
The show mac address-table notification command is used to display the
MAC notificaiton configuration globally or on the specified port.
Syntax
show mac address-table notification { all | interface gigabitEthernet
port
}
Parameter
all
—— Displays the notificaiton information globally and of all the Ethernet
ports.
port
—— Displays the notification information on the specified port.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the notificaiton configuration of all the ports:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show mac address-table notification all
20.17 show mac address-table security
Description
The show mac address-table security command is used to display the MAC
address security configuration globally or of the specified VLAN.
Syntax
show mac address-table security [ vid
vid
]
Parameter
vid
——The specified VLAN id.
159
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the MAC address security configuration of VLAN 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show mac address-table security vid 1
160
Chapter 21 System Configuration Commands
System Commands can be used to configure the System information and System IP, reboot
and reset the switch, upgrade the switch system and other operations.
21.1 system-time manual
Description
The system-time manual command is used to configure the system time
manually.
Syntax
system-time manual
time
Parameter
time
—— Set the date and time manually, MM/DD/YYYY-HH:MM:SS. The valid
value of the year ranges from 2000 to 2037.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the system mode as manual, and the time is 12/20/2010 17:30:35
T2500G-10MPS(config)# system-time manual 12/20/2010-17:30:35
21.2 system-time ntp
Description
The system-time ntp command is used to configure the time zone and the IP
address for the NTP Server. The switch will get UTC automatically if it has
connected to an NTP Server.
Syntax
system-time ntp {
timezone
} {
ntp-server
} {
backup-ntp-server
}
{
fetching-rate
}
Parameter
timezone
—— Your local time-zone, and it ranges from UTC-12:00 to
UTC+13:00.
161
The detailed information that each time-zone means are displayed as follow:
UTC-12:00 —— TimeZone for International Date Line West.
UTC-11:00 —— TimeZone for Coordinated Universal Time-11.
UTC-10:00 —— TimeZone for Hawaii.
UTC-09:00 —— TimeZone for Alaska.
UTC-08:00 —— TimeZone for Pacific Time(US Canada).
UTC-07:00 —— TimeZone for Mountain Time(US Canada).
UTC-06:00 —— TimeZone for Central Time(US Canada).
UTC-05:00 —— TimeZone for Eastern Time(US Canada).
UTC-04:30 —— TimeZone for Caracas.
UTC-04:00 —— TimeZone for Atlantic Time(Canada).
UTC-03:30 —— TimeZone for Newfoundland.
UTC-03:00 —— TimeZone for Buenos Aires, Salvador, Brasilia.
UTC-02:00 —— TimeZone for Mid-Atlantic.
UTC-01:00 —— TimeZone for Azores, Cape Verde Is.
UTC —— TimeZone for Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London.
UTC+01:00 —— TimeZone for Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm,
Vienna.
UTC+02:00 —— TimeZone for Cairo, Athens, Bucharest, Amman, Beirut,
Jerusalem.
UTC+03:00 —— TimeZone for Kuwait, Riyadh, Baghdad.
UTC+03:30 —— TimeZone for Tehran.
UTC+04:00 —— TimeZone for Moscow, St.Petersburg, Volgograd, Tbilisi,
Port Louis.
UTC+04:30 —— TimeZone for Kabul.
UTC+05:00 —— TimeZone for Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent.
UTC+05:30 —— TimeZone for Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, New Delhi.
UTC+05:45 —— TimeZone for Kathmandu.
UTC+06:00 —— TimeZone for Dhaka,Astana, Ekaterinburg.
UTC+06:30 —— TimeZone for Yangon (Rangoon).
UTC+07:00 —— TimeZone for Novosibrisk, Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta.
UTC+08:00—— TimeZone for Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi,
Singapore.
UTC+09:00 —— TimeZone for Seoul, Irkutsk, Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo.
UTC+09:30 —— TimeZone for Darwin, Adelaide.
UTC+10:00 —— TimeZone for Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney, Brisbane.
UTC+11:00 —— TimeZone for Solomon Is., New Caledonia, Vladivostok.
UTC+12:00 —— TimeZone for Fiji, Magadan, Auckland, Welington.
UTC+13:00 —— TimeZone for Nuku'alofa, Samoa.
ntp-server
—— The IP address for the Primary NTP Server.
162
backup-ntp-server
—— The IP address for the Secondary NTP Server.
fetching-rate
—— Specify the rate fetching time from NTP server.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the system time mode as NTP, the time zone is UTC-12:00, the
primary NTP server is 133.100.9.2 and the secondary NTP server is
139.78.100.163, the fetching-rate is 11 hours:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# system-time ntp UTC-12:00 133.100.9.2
139.79.100.163 11
21.3 system-time dst predefined
Description
The system-time dst predefined command is used to select a daylight
saving time configuration from the predefined mode. The configuration can
be used recurrently. To disable DST function, please use no system-time dst
command.
Syntax
system-time dst predefined [ USA
|
Australia | Europe | New-Zealand ]
no system-time dst
Parameter
USA
|
Australia | Europe | New-Zealand —— The mode of daylight saving time.
There are 4 options which are USA, Australia, Europe and New-Zealand
respectively. The default value is Europe.
Following are the time ranges of each option:
USA: Second Sunday in March, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in November, 02:00.
Australia: First Sunday in October, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in April, 03:00.
Europe: Last Sunday in March, 01:00 ~ Last Sunday in October, 01:00.
New Zealand: Last Sunday in September, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in April, 03:00.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
163
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the daylight saving time as USA standard:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#system-time dst predefined USA
21.4 system-time dst date
Description
The system-time dst date command is used to configure the one-off
daylight saving time. The start date is in the current year by default. The time
range of the daylight saving time must shorter than one year, but you can
configure it spanning years. To disable DST function, please use no
system-time dst command.
Syntax
system-time dst date {
smonth
} {
sday
} {
stime
} {
syear
} {
emonth
} {
eday
} {
etime
}
{
eyear
}[
offset
]
no system-time dst
Parameter
smonth
——The start month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values
showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.
sday
—— The start day of the daylight saving time, ranging from 1 to 31. Here
you should show special attention to February and the differences between a
solar month and a lunar month.
stime
—— The start moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.
syear
—— The start year of the daylight saving time.
emonth
—— The end month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values
showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.
eday
—— The end day of the daylight saving time, ranging from q to 31. Here
you should show special attention to February and the differences between a
solar month and a lunar month.
etime
—— The end moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.
eyear
—— The end year of the daylight saving time.
offset
—— The number of minutes to add during the daylight saving time. It is
60 minutes by default.
164
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the daylight saving time from zero clock, Apr 1st to zero clock Oct
1st and the offset is 30 minutes in 2015:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# system-time dst date Apr 1 00:00 2015 Oct 1
00:00 2015 30
21.5 system-time dst recurring
Description
The system-time dst recurring command is used to configure the recurring
daylight saving time. It can be configured spanning years. To disable DST
function, please use no system-time dst command.
Syntax
system-time dst recurring {
sweek
} {
sday
} {
smonth
} {
stime
} {
eweek
} {
eday
}
{
emonth
} {
etime
} [
offset
]
no system-time dst
Parameter
sweek
——The start week of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values
showing as follows: first, second, third, fourth, last.
sday
—— The start day of the daylight saving time. There are 7 values
showing as follows: Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat.
smonth
—— The start month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values
showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.
stime
—— The start moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.
eweek
——The end week of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values
showing as follows: first, second, third, fourth, last.
eday
—— The end day of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values
showing as follows: Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat.
emonth
—— The end month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values
showing as following: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov,
Dec.
165
etime
—— The end moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.
offset
—— The number of minutes to add during the daylight saving time. It is
60 minutes by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the daylight saving time from 2:00am, the first Sunday of May to
2:00am, the last Sunday of Oct and the offset is 45 minutes:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# system-time dst recurring first Sun May 02:00 last
Sun Oct 02:00 45
21.6 hostname
Description
The hostname command is used to configure the system name. To clear the
system name information, please use no hostname command.
Syntax
hostname [
hostname
]
no hostname
Parameter
hostname
—— System Name. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 32
characters. By default, it is the device name, for example “T2500G-10MPS”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the system name as TPLINK:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# hostname TPLINK
166
21.7 location
Description
The location command is used to configure the system location. To clear the
system location information, please use no location command.
Syntax
location [
location
]
no location
Parameter
location
—— Device Location. It consists of 32 characters at most. It is
“SHENZHEN” by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the system location as SHENZHEN:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# location SHENSHEN
21.8 contact-info
Description
The contact-info command is used to configure the system contact
information. To clear the system contact information, please use no
contact-info command.
Syntax
contact-info [
contact_info
]
no contact-info
Parameter
contact_info
—— Contact Information. It consists of 32 characters at most. It
is “www.tp-link.com” by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
167
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the system contact information as www.tp-link.com:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# contact
-
info www.tp-link.com
21.9 ip address
Description
This ip address command is used to configure the IP address and IP subnet
mask for the specified interface manually. The interface type includes: routed
port, port-channel interface, loopback interface and VLAN interface.
Syntax
ip address {
ip-addr
} {
mask
} [ secondary ]
no ip address [
ip-addr
] [
mask
]
Parameter
ip-addr
—— The IP address of the Layer 3 interface.
mask
—— The subnet mask of the Layer 3 interface.
secondary —— Specify the interface’s secondary IP address. If this
parameter is omitted here, the configured IP address is the interface’s
primary address.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create the VLAN interface 2 with the primary IP address as 192.168.1.1/24
and secondary IP address as 192.168.2.1/24:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ip address 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0
secondary
168
21.10 ip address-alloc
Description
The IP address-alloc command is used to enable the DHCP Client function or
the BOOTP Protocol. When this function is enabled, the specified interface
will obtain IP from DHCP Server or BOOTP server. To disable the IP obtaining
function on the specified interface, please use the no ip address command.
This command applies to the routed port, the port-channel interface and the
VLAN interface.
Syntax
ip address-alloc { dhcp | bootp }
no ip address
Parameter
dhcp
—— Specify the Layer 3 interface to obtain IP address from the DHCP
Server.
bootp
—— Specify the Layer 3 interface to obtain IP address from the
BOOTP Server.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP Client function on the Lay 3 routed port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# no switchport
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ip address-alloc dhcp
Disable the IP address obtaining function on the VLAN interface 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# no ip address
169
21.11 reset
Description
The reset command is used to reset the switch’s software. After resetting, all
configuration of the switch will restore to the factory defaults and your
current settings will be lost.
Syntax
reset
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Reset the software of the switch:
T2500G-10MPS# reset
21.12 reboot
Description
The reboot command is used to reboot the Switch. To avoid damage, please
don’t turn off the device while rebooting.
Syntax
reboot
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Reboot the switch:
T2500G-10MPS# reboot
170
21.13 reboot-schedule
Description
This reboot-schedule command is used to configure the switch to reboot at
a certain time point. To delete the reboot schedule settings, please use the
reboot-schedule cancel command.
Syntax
reboot-schedule at
time
[
date
] [ save_before_reboot ]
reboot-schedule in
interval
[ save_before_reboot ]
reboot-schedule cancel
Parameter
time
—— Specify the time point for the switch to reboot, in the format of
hh:mm.
date
—— Specify the date for the switch to reboot, in the format of
DD:MM:YYYY. The date should be within 30 days.
save_before_reboot
—— Save the configuration file before the switch
reboots.
interval
—— Specify a time period after which the switch reboots. It ranges
from 1 to 43200 minutes.
cancel —— Delete the reboot schedule settings.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
In the command reboot-schedule at
time
[
date
] [ save_before_reboot ], if
no date is specified and the time you set here is later than the time that this
command is executed, the switch will reboot later that day; otherwise the
switch will reboot at the time point the next day.
Example
Specify the switch to save the configuration files and reboot in 200 minutes,:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# reboot-schedule in 200 save_before_reboot
171
21.14 copy running-config startup-config
Description
The copy running-config startup-config command is used to save the
current settings.
Syntax
copy running-config startup-config
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Save current settings:
T2500G-10MPS# copy running-config startup-config
21.15 copy startup-config tftp
Description
The copy startup-config tftp command is used to backup the configuration
file to TFTP server.
Syntax
copy startup-config tftp ip-address
ip-addr
filename
name
Parameter
ip-addr
—— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
name
—— Specify the name for the configuration file which would be backup.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Backup the configuration files to TFTP server with the IP 192.168.0.148 and
name this file config.cfg:
172
T2500G-10MPS# copy startup-config tftp ip-address 192.168.0.148
filename
config
Backup the configuration files to TFTP server with the IP fe80::1234 and name
this file config.cfg:
T2500G-10MPS# copy startup-config tftp ip-address fe80::1234 filename
config
21.16 copy tftp startup-config
Description
The copy tftp startup-config command is used to download the
configuration file to the switch from TFTP server.
Syntax
copy tftp startup-config ip-address
ip-addr
filename
name
Parameter
ip-addr
—— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
name
—— Specify the name for the configuration file which would be
downloaded.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Download the configuration file named as config.cfg to the switch from TFTP
server with the IP 192.168.0.148:
T2500G-10MPS# copy tftp startup-config ip-address 192.168.0.148
filename
config
Download the configuration file named as config.cfg to the switch from TFTP
server with the IP fe80::1234
T2500G-10MPS# copy tftp startup-config ip-address fe80::1234
filename
config
173
21.17 boot application
Description
The boot application command is used to configure the image file as startup
image or backup image.
Syntax
boot application filename { image1 | image 2 } { startup | backup }
no boot application
Parameter
image1 | image2 —— Specify the image file to be configured. By default, the
image1.bin is the startup image and the image2.bin is the backup image.
startup | backup —— Specify the property of the image, either startup image
or backup image.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the image2.bin as the startup image:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# boot application filename image2 startup
21.18 remove backup-image
Description
The remove backup-image command is used to delete the backup-image.
Syntax
remove backup-image
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
174
Example
Delete the backup image file:
T2500G-10MPS# remove backup-image
21.19 firmware upgrade
Description
The firmware upgrade command is used to upgrade the switch’s backup
iamge file via the TFTP server. The uploaded firmware file will take place of
the Backup Image, and user can chose whether to reboot the switch will the
Backup Image.
Syntax
firmware upgrade ip-address
ip-addr
filename
name
Parameter
ip-addr
—— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.
name
—— Specify the name for the firmware file.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Upgrade the switch’s backup iamge file with the file firmware.bin in the TFTP
server with the IP address 192.168.0.148, and reboot the switch with this
firmware:
T2500G-10MPS# firmware upgrade ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename
firmware.bin
It will only upgrade the backup image. Continue? (Y/N):y
Operation OK!
Reboot with the backup image? (Y/N): y
Upgrade the switch’s backup iamge file with the file firmware.bin in the TFTP
server with the IP address fe80::1234, but do not reboot the switch:
175
T2500G-10MPS# firmware upgrade ip-address fe80::1234 filename
firmware.bin
It will only upgrade the backup image. Continue? (Y/N):y
Operation OK!
Reboot with the backup image? (Y/N): n
21.20 boot autoinstall start
Description
The boot autoinstall start command is used to start Auto Install function. To
stop the Auto Install function, use no boot autoinstall start.
Syntax
boot autoinstall start
no boot autoinstall start
Command mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Start Auto Install function:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# boot autoinstall start
21.21 boot autoinstall persistent-mode
Description
The boot autoinstall persistent-mode command is used to start Auto Install
function to next reboot cycle. To diable persistent mode use no boot
autoinstall persistent-mode.
Syntax
boot autoinstall persistent-mode
no boot autoinstall persistent-mode
Command mode
Global Configuration Mode
176
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Start Auto Install function:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# boot autoinstall persistent-mode
21.22 boot autoinstall auto-save
Description
The boot autoinstall auto-save command is used to automatically save the
new configuration file that was downloaded by Auto Install function to
start-up configuration file Auto Install. To disable auto-save configuration
feature use no boot autoinstall auto-save.
Syntax
boot autoinstall auto-save
no boot autoinstall auto-save
Command mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure Auto Install function to auto-save new configuration file to start-up
configuration file:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# boot autoinstall auto-save
21.23 boot autoinstall auto-reboot
Description
The boot autoinstall auto-reboot command is used to automatically reboot
the switch after Auto Install function is completed successfully. To disable
auto-reboot feature use no boot autoinstall auto-reboot.
Syntax
boot autoinstall auto-reboot
no boot autoinstall auto-reboot
177
Command mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the switch to auto reboot after Auto Install function completed
successfully:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# boot autoinstall auto-reboot
21.24 boot autoinstall retry-count
Description
The boot autoinstall retry-count command is used to configure retry count
when Auto Install function uses TFTP to download configuration files in a
cycle of Auto Install process. To set retry count to default value use no boot
autoinstall retry-count.
Syntax
boot autoinstall retry-count
count
no boot autoinstall retry-count
Parameter
count
—— The count of retrying auto install. The value ranges from 1 to 3.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure TFTP retry 2 times when download files failed:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# boot autoinstall retry-count 2
21.25 show boot autoinstall
Description
The show boot autoinstall command is used to display the configuration of
Auto Install function.
178
Syntax
show boot autoinstall
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of Auto Install function:
T2500G-10MPS # show boot autoinstall
21.26 show boot autoinstall downloaded-config
Description
The show boot autoinstall downloaded-config command is used to display
the configuration file which downloaded by Auto Install.
Syntax
show boot autoinstall downloaded-config
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration file which downloaded by Auto Install:
T2500G-10MPS # show boot autoinstall downloaded-config
21.27 ping
Description
The ping command is used to test the connectivity between the switch and
one node of the network.
Syntax
ping [ ip | ipv6 ] {
ip_addr
} [ -n
count
] [ -l
count
] [ -i
count
]
179
Parameter
ip —— The type of the IP address for ping test should be IPv4.
ipv6 —— The type of the IP address for ping test should be IPv6.
ip_addr
—— The IP address of the destination node for ping test. If the
parameter ip/ipv6 is not selected, both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are
supported, for example 192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234.
-n
count
—— The amount of times to send test data during Ping testing. It
ranges from 1 to 10. By default, this value is 4.
-l
count
—— The size of the sending data during ping testing. It ranges from 1
to 1500 bytes. By default, this value is 64.
-i
count
—— The interval to send ICMP request packets. It ranges from 100
to 1000 milliseconds. By default, this value is 1000.
Command Mode
User EXEC Mode and Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
To test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the
IP 192.168.0.131, please specify the
count
(-l) as 512 bytes and
count
(-i) as
1000 milliseconds. If there is not any response after 8 times’ Ping test, the
connection between the switch and the network device is failed to establish:
T2500G-10MPS# ping 192.168.0.131 –n 8 –l 512
To test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the
IP fe80::1234, please specify the
count
(-l) as 512 bytes and
count
(-i) as 1000
milliseconds. If there is not any response after 8 times’ Ping test, the
connection between the switch and the network device is failed to establish:
T2500G-10MPS# ping fe80::1234 –n 8 –l 512
21.28 tracert
Description
The tracert command is used to test the connectivity of the gateways during
its journey from the source to destination of the test data.
Syntax
tracert [ ip | ipv6 ]
ip_addr
[
maxHops
]
180
Parameter
ip —— The type of the IP address for tracert test should be IPv4.
ipv6 —— The type of the IP address for tracert test should be IPv6.
ip_addr
—— The IP address of the destination device. If the parameter ip/ipv6
is not selected, both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example
192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234.
maxHops
—— The maximum number of the route hops the test data can pass
though. It ranges from 1 to 30. By default, this value is 4.
Command Mode
User EXEC Mode and Privileged EXEC Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP
192.168.0.131. If the destination device has not been found after 20
maxHops
,
the connection between the switch and the destination device is
failed to establish:
T2500G-10MPS# tracert 192.168.0.131 20
Test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP
fe80::1234. If the destination device has not been found after 20
maxHops
,
the connection between the switch and the destination device is failed to
establish:
T2500G-10MPS# tracert fe80::1234 20
21.29 show system-info
Description
The show system-info command is used to display System Description,
System Name, System Location, Contact Information, Hardware Version,
Software Version, Bootloader Version, Mac Address, System Time, Run Time
and so on.
Syntax
show system-info
181
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the system information:
T2500G-10MPS# show system-info
21.30 show system-info interface
Description
The show system-info interface command is used to display the utilization
of the connected Ethernet port.
Syntax
show system-info interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the utilization of port 18:
T2500G-10MPS# show system-info interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/18
21.31 show image-info
Description
The show imsage-info command is used to display the information of image
files in the system.
Syntax
show image-info
182
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the system image files’ information:
T2500G-10MPS# show image-info
21.32 show boot
Description
The show boot command is used to display the boot configuration of the
system.
Syntax
show boot
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the system boot configuration information:
T2500G-10MPS# show boot
21.33 show running-config
Description
The show running-config command is used to display the current operating
configuration of the system or of a specified port.
Syntax
show running-config
183
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the system current operating configuration:
T2500G-10MPS# show running-config
21.34 show startup-config
Description
The show startup-config command is used to display the current
configuration saved in the switch. These configuration settings will not be lost
the next time you reboot the switch.
Syntax
show startup-config
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the saved configuration:
T2500G-10MPS# show startup-config
21.35 show system-time
Description
The show system-time command is used to display the time information of
the switch.
Syntax
show system-time
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
184
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the time information of the switch
T2500G-10MPS# show system-time
21.36 show system-time dst
Description
The show system-time dst command is used to display the DST time
information of the switch.
Syntax
show system-time dst
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the DST time information of the switch
T2500G-10MPS# show system-time dst
21.37 show system-time ntp
Description
The show system-time ntp command is used to display the NTP mode
configuration information.
Syntax
show system-time ntp
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
185
Example
Display the NTP mode configuration information of the switch:
T2500G-10MPS# show system-time ntp
21.38 show cable-diagnostics interface
gigabitEthernet
Description
The show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet command is used to
display the cable diagnostics of the connected Ethernet Port., which
facilitates you to check the connection status of the cable connected to the
switch, locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network.
Syntax
show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet
port
Parameter
port
—— The number of the port which is selected for Cable test.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Show the cable-diagnostics of port 3:
T2500G-10MPS# show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
21.39 show cable-diagnostics careful interface
Description
The show cable-diagnostics careful interface gigabitEthernet command is
used to display the connection status of the cable connected to the switch.
Syntax
show cable-diagnostics careful interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
—— The number of the port which is selected for Cable test.
186
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Show the cable-diagnostics of port 3:
T2500G-10MPS# show cable-diagnostics careful interface
gigabitEthernet
1/0/3
21.40 show cpu-utilization
Description
The show cpu-utilization command is used to display the system’s CPU
utilization in the last 5 seconds/1minute/5minutes.
Syntax
show cpu-utilization
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the CPU utilization information of the switch:
T2500G-10MPS# show cpu-utilization
21.41 show memory-utilization
Description
The show memory-utilization command is used to display the system’s
memory utilization in the last 5 seconds/1minute/5minutes.
Syntax
show memory-utilization
187
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the memory utilization information of the switch:
T2500G-10MPS# show memory-utilization
188
Chapter 22 IPv6 Address Configuration Commands
The IPv6 address configuration commands are provided in the Interface Configuration Mode,
which includes the routed port, the port-channel interface and the VLAN interface. Enter the
configuration mode of these Layer 3 interfaces and configure their IPv6 parameters.
22.1 ipv6 enable
Description
This command is used to enable the IPv6 function on the speicified Layer 3
interface. IPv6 function should be enabled before the IPv6 address
configuration management. By default it is enabled on VLAN interface 1. IPv6
function can only be enabled on one Layer 3 interface at a time.
If the IPv6 function is disabled, the corresponding IPv6-based modules will be
invalid, for example SSHv6, SSLv6, TFTPv6 etc. To disable the IPv6 function,
please use no ipv6 enable command.
Syntax
ipv6 enable
no ipv6 enable
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IPv6 function on the VLAN interface 1：
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ipv6 enable
22.2 ipv6 address autoconfig
Description
This command is used to enable the automatic configuration of the ipv6
link-local address. The switch has only one ipv6 link-local address, which can
be configured automatically or manually. The general ipv6 link-local address
189
has the prefix as fe80::/10. IPv6 routers cannot forward packets that have
link-local source or destination addresses to other links. The autuconfigured
ipv6 link-local address is in EUI-64 format. To verify the uniqueness of the
link-local address, the manually configured ipv6 link-local address will be
deleted when the autoconfigured ipv6 link-local address takes effect.
Syntax
ipv6 address autoconfig
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the automatic configuration of the ipv6 link-local address on VLAN
interface 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ipv6 address autoconfig
22.3 ipv6 address link-local
Description
The ipv6 address link-local command is used to configure the ipv6 link-local
address manually on a specified interface. To delete the configured link-local
address, please use no ipv6 address link-local command.
Syntax
ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
link-local
no ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
link-local
Parameter
ipv6-addr
—— The link-local address of the interface. It should be a
standardized IPv6 address with the prefix fe80::/10, otherwise this command
will be invalid.
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
190
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the link-local address as fe80::1234 on the VLAN interface 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ipv6 address fe80::1234 link-local
22.4 ipv6 address dhcp
Description
The ipv6 address dhcp command is used to enable the DHCPv6 Client
function. When this function is enabled, the Layer 3 interface will try to obtain
IP from DHCPv6 server. To delete the allocated IP from DHCPv6 server and
disable the DHCPv6 Client function, please use no ipv6 address dhcp
command.
Syntax
ipv6 address dhcp
no ipv6 address dhcp
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the DHCP Client function on VLAN interface 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ipv6 address dhcp
22.5 ipv6 address ra
Description
This command is used to configure the interface’s global IPv6 address
according to the address prefix and other configuration parameters from its
191
received RA(Router Advertisement) message. To disable this function, please
use no ipv6 address ra command.
Syntax
ipv6 address ra
no ipv6 address ra
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the automatic ipv6 address configuration function to obtain IPv6
address through the RA message on VLAN interface 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ipv6 address ra
22.6 ipv6 address eui-64
Description
This command is used to manually configure a global IPv6 address with an
extended unique identifier (EUI) in the low-order 64 bits on the interface.
Specify only the network prefix. The last 64 bits are automatically computed
from the switch MAC address. To remove an EUI-64 IPv6 address from the
interface, please use the no ipv6 address eui-64 command.
Syntax
ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
eui-64
no ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
eui-64
Parameter
ipv6-addr
—— Global IPv6 address with 64 bits network prefix, for example
3ffe::1/64.
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
192
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure an EUI-64 global address on the interface with the network prefix
3ffe::1/64:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ipv6 address 3ffe::1/64 eui-64
22.7 ipv6 address
Description
This command is used to manually configure a global IPv6 address on the
interface. To remove a global IPv6 address from the interface, please use no
ipv6 address command.
Syntax
ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
no ipv6 address
ipv6-addr
Parameter
ipv6-addr
—— Global IPv6 address with network prefix, for example
3ffe::1/64.
Configuration Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the global address 3001::1/64 on VLAN interface 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ipv6 address 3001::1/64
193
22.8 show ipv6 interface
Description
This command is used to display the configured ipv6 information of the
management interface, including ipv6 function status, link-local address and
global address, ipv6 multicast groups etc.
Syntax
show ipv6 interface
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the ipv6 information of the management interface:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ipv6 interface
194
Chapter 23 Ethernet Configuration Commands
Ethernet Configuration Commands can be used to configure the Bandwidth Control,
Negotiation Mode and Storm Control for Ethernet ports.
23.1 interface gigabitEthernet
Description
The interface gigabitEthernet command is used to enter the Interface
gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure the corresponding Gigabit
Ethernet port.
Syntax
interface gigabitEthernet
port
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
To enter the Interface gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure port
2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
23.2 interface range gigabitEthernet
Description
The interface range gigabitEthernet command is used to enter the interface
range gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure multiple Gigabit
Ethernet ports at the same time.
195
Syntax
interface range gigabitEthernet
port-list
Parameter
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
Command in the Interface Range gigabitEthernet Mode is executed
independently on all ports in the range. It does not affect the execution on the
other ports at all if the command results in an error on one port.
Example
To enter the Interface range gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode, and
configure ports 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 and 9 at the same time by adding them to one
port-list:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet
1/0/1-3,1/0/6-7,1/0/9
23.3 description
Description
The description command is used to add a description to the Ethernet port.
To clear the description of the corresponding port, please use no
description command.
Syntax
description
string
no description
Parameter
string
—— Content of a port description, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
196
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add a description Port_5 to port 1/0/5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# description Port_5
23.4 shutdown
Description
The shutdown command is used to disable an Ethernet port. To enable this
port again, please use no shutdown command.
Syntax
shutdown
no shutdown
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Disable port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# shutdown
197
23.5 flow-control
Description
The flow-control command is used to enable the flow-control function for a
port. To disable the flow-control function for this corresponding port, please
use no flow-control command. With the flow-control function enabled, the
Ingress Rate and Egress Rate can be synchronized to avoid packet loss in the
network.
Syntax
flow-control
no flow-control
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the flow-control function for port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# flow-control
23.6 duplex
Description
The duplex command is used to configure the Duplex Mode for an Ethernet
port. To return to the default configuration, please use no duplex command.
Syntax
duplex { auto | full | half }
no duplex
Parameter
auto | full | half —— The duplex mode of the Ethernet port. There are three
options: auto-negotiation mode, full-duplex mode and half-duplex mode. By
default the Gigabit Ethernet port is auto-negotiation mode.
198
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the Duplex Mode as full-duplex for port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# duplex full
23.7 jumbo
Description
The jumbo command is used to allow the jumbo frame to pass through this
port. To disable this feature, please use no jumbo command. This feature is
disabled by default.
Syntax
jumbo
no jumbo
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Allow jumbo frame on port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# jumbo
23.8 jumbo-size
Description
The jumbo-size command is used to specify the size of jumbo frames.
199
Syntax
jumbo-size
size
Parameter
size
—— The value of jumbo frames. It ranges from 1518 to 9216 bytes, and
the default is 1518 bytes.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Globally configure the size of jumbo frames as 9216:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# jumbo-size 9216
23.9 speed
Description
The speed command is used to configure the Speed Mode for an Ethernet
port. To return to the default configuration, please use no speed command.
Syntax
speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto }
no speed
Parameter
10 | 100 | 1000 | auto —— The speed mode of the Ethernet port. There are
four options: 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps and Auto negotiation mode
(default).
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the Speed Mode as 100Mbps for port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
200
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# speed 100
23.10 storm-control
Description
The storm-control command is used to enable the broadcast, multicast, or
unicast strom control function and to set threshold levels on an interface. To
disable the storm control function, please use no storm-control command.
Syntax
storm-control { broadcast | multicast | unicast } { kbps | ratio } {
rate
}
no storm-control { broadcast | multicast | unicast }
Parameter
broadcast | multicast | unicast —— Enable broadcast/multicast/unicast storm
control on the interface.
kbps | ratio —— Specify the storm control type.
kbps: Specify the threshold in kbits per second.
ratio: Specify the threshold as a percentage of the bandwidth.
rate
—— Specify the bandwidth for receiving packets on the port. The
specified type of packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded.
For kbps, the rate ranges from 1 to 1000000 kbps. For ratio, the rate ranges
from 1 to 100 percent.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
Before you configure the storm-control type as kbps or ratio, pelease ensure
that the port is not in pps mode.
Example
Configure the broadcast storm control rate as 1000 kbps on port 1/0/5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# storm-control broadcast kbps 1000
201
23.11 bandwidth
Description
The bandwidth command is used to configure the bandwidth limit for an
Ethernet port. To disable the bandwidth limit, please use no bandwidth
command.
Syntax
bandwidth {[ ingress
ingress-rate
] [ egress
egress-rate
]}
no bandwidth { all | ingress | egress }
Parameter
ingress-rate
—— Specify the bandwidth for receiving packets. Range:
1-1000000Kbps for the gigaport.
egress-rate
—— Specify the bandwidth for sending packets. Range:
1-1000000Kbps for the gigaport.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the ingress-rate as 5120Kbps and egress-rate as 1024Kbps for
port 1/0/5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# bandwidth ingress 5120 egress 1024
23.12 clear counters
Description
The clear counters command is used to clear the statistics information of all
the Ethernet ports and port channels.
Syntax
clear counters
clear counters interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
] [ port-channel
port-channel-id
]
202
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Clear the statistic information of all ports and port channels:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# clear counters
23.13 show interface status
Description
The show interface status command is used to display the connection
status of the Ethernet port/port channel.
Syntax
show interface status [ gigabitEthernet
port
] [ port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel..
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the connection status of all ports and port channels:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show interface status
Display the connection status of port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show interface status gigabitEthernet
1/0/1
203
23.14 show interface counters
Description
The show interface counters command is used to display the statistics
information of all ports/port channels.
Syntax
show interface counters [ gigabitEthernet
port
] [ port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the statistics information of all Ethernet ports and port channels:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show interface counters
Display the statistics information of port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show interface counters gigabitEthernet
1/0/2
23.15 show interface configuration
Description
The show interface configuration command is used to display the
configurations of all ports and port channels, including Port-status, Flow
Control, Negotiation Mode and Port-description.
Syntax
show interface configuration [ gigabitEthernet
port
] [ port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
204
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configurations of all Ethernet ports and port channels:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show interface configuration
Display the configurations of port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show interface configuration gigabitEthernet
1/0/2
23.16 show storm-control
Description
The show storm-control command is used to display the storm-control
information of Ethernet ports.
Syntax
show storm-control interface [ gigabitEthernet
port-list
]
[ port-channel
port-channel-id-list
]
Parameter
port-list
——The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-id-list
—— The list of port channels.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the storm-control information of port 4, 5, 6, and 7:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show storm-control interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/4-7
23.17 show bandwidth
Description
The show bandwidth command is used to display the bandwidth-limit
information of Ethernet ports.
205
Syntax
show bandwidth interface [ gigabitEthernet
port-list
]
[ port-channel
port-channel-id-list
]
Parameter
port-list
——The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-id-list
—— The list of port channels.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the bandwidth-limit information of port 1/0/4:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show bandwidth interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4
206
Chapter 24 QoS Commands
QoS (Quality of Service) function is used to optimize the network performance. It provides you
with network service experience of a better quality.
24.1 qos
Description
The qos command is used to configure CoS (Class of Service) based on port.
To return to the default configuration, please use no qos command.
Syntax
qos
tc-id
no qos
Parameter
tc-id
—— The priority of port. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represent TC0-TC7
respectively. By default, the priority is 0.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
Port priority is one property of the port. When the port priority is specified,
the data will be classified into the egress queue based on the tc value of the
current port.
Example
Configure the priority of port 5 as 3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# qos 3
207
24.2 qos cos
Description
The qos cos command is used to enable the mapping relation between
IEEE802.1P Priority and TC egress queue. To disable the mapping relation,
please use no qos cos command.
Syntax
qos cos
no qos cos
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
IEEE 802.1P gives the Pri field in IEEE 802.1Q tag a recommended definition.
When the mapping relation between IEEE 802.1P Priority and TC egress
queue is enabled, the data will be classified into the egress queue based on
this mapping relation.
Example
Enable the mapping relation between IEEE 802.1P Priority and egress queue:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# qos cos
24.3 qos dscp
Description
The qos dscp command is used to enable the mapping relation between
DSCP Priority and CoS value. To disable the mapping relation, please use no
qos dscp command.
Syntax
qos dscp
no qos dscp
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
208
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP ToS field given by IEEE.
DSCP priorities are mapped to the corresponding 802.1p priorities. IP
datagram will be classified into the egress queue based on the mapping
relation between DSCP priority and CoS value.
Example
Enable the mapping relation between DSCP Priority and CoS value:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# qos dscp
24.4 qos queue cos-map
Description
The qos queue cos-map command is used to configure the mapping relation
between IEEE 802.1P priority tag/IEEE 802.1Q tag, CoS value and the TC
egress queue. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos
queue cos-map command. When 802.1P Priority is enabled, the packets with
802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P priority
mode. The untagged packets are mapped based on port priority mode.
Syntax
qos queue cos-map {
tag
/
cos-id
} {
tc-id
}
no qos queue cos-map
Parameter
tag /cos-id
—— The 8 priority levels defined by IEEE 802.1P or the priority
level the packets with tag are mapped to, which ranges from CoS 0 to CoS 7.
tc-id
—— The egress queue the packets with tag are mapped to. It ranges
from 0 to 7, which represents TC0 toTC7 respectively.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
209
User Guidelines
1. By default, the mapping relation between tag/cos and the egress queue
is:
0/CoS 0-TC1, 1/CoS 1-TC0, 2/CoS 2-TC2, 3/CoS 3-TC3, 4/CoS
4-TC4, 5/CoS 5-TC5, 6/CoS 6-TC6, 7/CoS 7-TC7.
2. Among the priority levels TC0-TC7, the bigger value, the higher
priority.
Example
Map CoS 5 to TC 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# qos queue cos-map 5 2
24.5 qos queue dscp-map
Description
The qos queue dscp-map command is used to configure the mapping
relation between DSCP Priority and the CoS value. To return to the default
configuration, please use no qos queue dscp-map command. DSCP
(DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP ToS field given by IEEE. This field
is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities. When DSCP Priority is enabled,
IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on DSCP priority
mode; non-IP datagram with IEEE 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority
levels based on IEEE 802.1P priority mode if IEEE 802.1P Priority is enabled;
the untagged non-IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode.
Syntax
qos queue dscp-map {
dscp-list
} {
tc-id
}
no qos queue dscp-map
Parameter
dscp-list
—— List of DSCP value. One or several DSCP values can be typed
using comma to separate. Use a hyphen to designate a range of values, for
instance, 1,4-7,11 indicates choosing 1,4,5,6,7,11. The DSCP value ranges
from 0 to 63.
tc-id
—— The priority level the packets with tag are mapped to, which ranges
from TC 0 to TC 7.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
210
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
User Guidelines
By default, the mapping relation between DSCP value and the egress queue is:
(0-7)-TC 0, (8-15)-TC 1, (16-23)-TC 2, (24-31)-TC 3, (32-39)-TC 4, (40-47)-TC
5, (48-55)-TC 6, (56-63)-TC 7.
Example
Map DSCP values 10-12 to TC 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# qos queue dscp-map 10-12 2
24.6 qos queue mode
Description
The qos queue mode command is used to configure the Schedule Mode. To
return to the default Equal-Mode, please use no qos queue mode command.
When the network is congested, the program that many packets complete for
resources must be solved, usually in the way of queue scheduling. The switch
will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority
queues and scheduling algorithms you set. On this switch, the priority levels
are labeled as TC0, TC1,TC2 … TC7.
Syntax
qos queue mode { sp | wrr | spwrr | equ }
no qos queue mode
Parameter
sp —— Strict-Priority Mode. In this mode, the queue with higher priority will
occupy the whole bandwidth. Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent
only when the queue with higher priority is empty.
wrr
—— Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, packets in all the queues
are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue. The weight values
of TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5,TC6 and TC7 are customized in qos queue
weight command and their default values are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 127
respectively.
spwrr —— Strict-Priority + Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, the
switch provides two scheduling groups, SP group and WRR group. SP group
is processed prior to WRR group. Queues in SP group are scheduled strictly
211
based on Strict-Priority mode while the queues inside WRR group follow the
WRR mode. In SP+WRR mode, TC7 and the queue with its weight value set as
0 are in the SP group; other queues, with none-zero weight value, belong to
the WRR group and the weight value can be customized in qos queue weight
command. The weight values of TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5 and TC6 are 1,
2, 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 respectively, while the value of TC7 is 0 and
non-configurable.
equ —— Equal-Mode. In this mode, all the queues occupy the bandwidth
equally. The weight value ratio of all the queues is 1:1:1:1:1:1:1:1
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the Schedule Mode as Weight Round Robin Mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# qos queue mode wrr
24.7 qos queue weight
Description
The qos queue weight command is used to configure weight value of each
queue after the Schedule Mode is specified as WRR or SP+WRR. The switch
will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority
queues and scheduling algorithms you set. On this switch, the priority levels
are labeled as TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5,TC6 and TC7.
Syntax
qos queue weight {
tc-id
} {
weight-value
}
Parameter
tc-id
—— The ID of the TC queue, ranging from 0 to 7.
weight-value
—— Configure the weight value of the specified TC queue.
When the schedule mode is specified as WRR, the weight value ranges from 1
to 127. The 8 queues will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio. The
default values of TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5,TC6 and TC7 are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16,
32, 64 and 127 respectively.
212
When the schedule mode is specified as SP+WRR, the weight value ranges
from 0 to 127. TC7 and the queue with its weight value set as 0 are in the SP
group; other queues, with none-zero weight value, belong to the WRR group.
In this SP+WRR scheduling mode, the queues in the SP group is scheduled
preferentially (TC6>TC5>TC4>TC3>TC2>TC1>TC0 in strict priority). When
there is no packets to be sent in the SP group, the queues in the WRR group
will be scheduled according to the weight value of each queue. The default
weight values of TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5 and TC6 are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32
and 64 respectively, while the value of TC7 is 0 and non-configurable.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the Schedule Mode as Weight Round Robin Mode, with the weight
values of TC0, TC1, TC2 and TC3 as 4, 7, 15 and 24:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# qos queue mode wrr
T2500G-10MPS(config)# qos queue weight 0 4
T2500G-10MPS(config)# qos queue weight 1 7
T2500G-10MPS(config)# qos queue weight 2 15
T2500G-10MPS(config)# qos queue weight 3 24
24.8 show qos interface
Description
The show qos interface command is used to display the configuration of
QoS based on port priority.
Syntax
show qos interface [ gigabitEthernet
port-list
]
[ port-channel
lagid-list
]
Parameter
port-list
——The list of Ethernet ports.
lagid-list
—— The list of LAGs.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
213
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of QoS for all ports and LAGs:
T2500G-10MPS# show qos interface
Display the configuration of QoS for ports 1/0/1-4:
T2500G-10MPS# show qos interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-4
24.9 show qos cos-map
Description
The show qos cos-map command is used to display the configuration of IEEE
802.1P Priority and the mapping relation between cos-id and tc-id.
Syntax
show qos cos-map
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of IEEE 802.1P Priority and the mapping relation
between cos-id and tc-id:
T2500G-10MPS# show qos cos-map
24.10 show qos dscp-map
Description
The show qos dscp-map command is used to display the configuration of
DSCP Priority.
Syntax
show qos dscp-map
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
214
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of DSCP Priority:
T2500G-10MPS# show qos dscp-map
24.11 show qos queue mode
Description
The show qos queue mode command is used to display the schedule rule of
the egress queues.
Syntax
show qos queue mode
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the schedule rule of the egress queues:
T2500G-10MPS# show qos queue mode
24.12 show qos status
Description
The show qos status command is used to display the status of IEEE 802.1P
priority and DSCP priority.
Syntax
show qos status
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the status of IEEE 802.1P priority and DSCP priority:
215
T2500G-10MPS# show qos status
216
Chapter 25 Port Mirror Commands
Port Mirror refers to the process of forwarding copies of packets from one port to a monitoring
port. Usually, the monitoring port is connected to data diagnose device, which is used to
analyze the monitored packets for monitoring and troubleshooting the network.
25.1 monitor session destination interface
Description
The monitor session destination
interface command is used to configure
the monitoring port. Each monitor session has only one monitoring port. To
change the monitoring port, please use the monitor session destination
interface
command by changing the port value. The no monitor session
command is used to delete the corresponding monitoring port or monitor
session.
Syntax
monitor session
session_num
destination
interface
gigabitEthernet
port
no monitor session
session_num
destination
interface
gigabitEthernet
port
no monitor session
session_num
Parameter
session_num
—— The monitor session number, can only be specified as 1.
port ——
The monitoring port number.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Create monitor session 1 and configure port 1/0/1 as the monitoring port:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# monitor session 1 destination interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Delete the monitoring port 1/0/2 from monitor session 1：
217
T2500G-10MPS(config)# no monitor session 1 destination interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
Delete the monitor session 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# no monitor session 1
25.2 monitor session source interface
Description
The monitor session source
interface
command is used to configure the
monitored port. To delete the corresponding monitored port, please use no
monitor session source
interface
command.
Syntax
monitor session
session_num
source
interface gigabitEthernet
port-list
mode
no monitor session
session_num
source
interface
gigabitEthernet
port-list
mode
Parameter
session_num
—— The monitor session number, can only be specified as 1.
port-list
—— List of monitored port. It is multi-optional.
mode
—— The monitor mode. There are three options: rx, tx and both. Rx
(ingress monitoring mode), means the incoming packets received by the
monitored port will be copied to the monitoring port. Tx (egress monitoring
mode), indicates the outgoing packets sent by the monitored port will be
copied to the monitoring port. Both (ingress and egress monitoring), presents
the incoming packets received and the outgoing packets sent by the
monitored port will both be copied to the monitoring port.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
1. The monitoring port is corresponding to current interface configuration
mode.
2. Monitored ports number is not limited, but it can’t be the monitoring port
at the same time.
218
3. Whether the monitoring port and monitored ports are in the same VLAN
or not is not demanded strictly.
4. The monitoring port and monitored ports cannot be link-aggregation
member.
Example
Create monitor session 1, then configure port 4, 5, 7 as monitored port and
enable ingress monitoring:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# monitor session 1 source interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/4-5,1/0/7 rx
Delete port 4 in monitor session 1 and its configuration:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# no monitor session 1 source interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/4 rx
25.3 show monitor session
Description
The show monitor session command is used to display the configuration of
port monitoring.
Syntax
show monitor session [
session_num
]
Parameter
session_num
—— The monitor session number, can only be specified as 1. It
is optional.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the monitoring configuration of monitor session 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show monitor session 1
219
Chapter 26 Port Isolation Commands
Port Isolation provides a method of restricting traffic flow to improve the network security by
forbidding the port to forward packets to the ports that are not on its forwarding port list.
26.1 port isolation
Description
The port isolation command is used to configure the forward port/port
channel list of a port/port channel, so that this port/port channel can only
communicate with the ports/port channels on its list. To delete the
corresponding configuration, please use no port isolation command.
Syntax
port isolation { [ gi-forward-list
gi-forward-list
] [ po-forward-list
po-forward-list
] }
no port isolation
Parameter
gi-forward-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
po
-forward-list
—— The list of port channels.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Set port 1, 2, 4 and port channel 2 to the forward list of port 1/0/5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# port isolation gi-forward-list 1/0/1-2,1/0/4
po-forward-list 2
Set all Ethernet ports and port channels to forward list of port 1/0/2, namely
restore to the default setting:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# no port isolation
220
26.2 show port isolation interface
Description
The show port isolation interface command is used to display the forward
port list of a port/port channel.
Syntax
show port isolation interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
port ——
The number of Ethernet port you want to show its forward port list,
in the format of 1/0/2.
port-channel-id ——
The ID of port channel you want to show its forward port
list, ranging from 1 to 6.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the forward-list of port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS# show port isolation interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
Display the forward-list of all Ethernet ports and port channels:
T2500G-10MPS# show port isolation interface
221
Chapter 27 Loopback Detection Commands
With loopback detection feature enabled, the switch can detect loops using loopback
detection packets. When a loop is detected, the switch will display an alert or further block the
corresponding port according to the configuration.
27.1 loopback-detection(global)
Description
The loopback-detection command is used to enable the loopback detection
function globally. To disable it, please use no loopback detection command.
Syntax
loopback-detection
no loopback-detection
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the loopback detection function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# loopback-detection
27.2 loopback-detection interval
Description
The loopback-detection interval command is used to define the interval of
sending loopback detection packets from switch ports to network, aiming at
detecting network loops periodically.
Syntax
loopback-detection interval
interval-time
Parameter
interval-time
—— The interval of sending loopback detection packets. It
ranges from 1 to 1000 seconds. By default, this value is 30.
222
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the interval-time as 50 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# loopback-detection interval 50
27.3 loopback-detection recovery-time
Description
The loopback-detection recovery-time command is used to configure the
time after which the blocked port would automatically recover to normal
status.
Syntax
loopback-detection recovery-time
recovery-time
Parameter
recovery-time
—— The time after which the blocked port would automatically
recover to normal status, and the loopback detection would restart. It is
integral times of detection interval, ranging from 1 to 100 and the default
value is 3.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the recovery-time
as 3 times of detection interval:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# loopback-detection recovery-time 3
223
27.4 loopback-detection(interface)
Description
The loopback-detection command is used to enable the loopback detection
function of the specified port. To disable it, please use no
loopback-detection command.
Syntax
loopback-detection
no loopback-detection
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the loopback detection function of ports 1-3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
T2500G-10MPS(Config-if-range)# loopback-detection
27.5 loopback-detection config
Description
The loopback-detection config command is used to configure the
process-mode and recovery-mode for the ports by which the switch copes
with the detected loops.
Syntax
loopback-detection config process-mode { alert | port-based }
recovery-mode { auto | manual }
Parameter
process-mode —— The mode how the switch processes the detected loops.
alert: When a loop is detected, display an alert.
port-based: When a loop is detected, display an alert and block the port.
recovery-mode —— The mode how the blocked port recovers to normal
status.
224
auto: Block status can be automatically removed after recovery time.
manual: Block status can only be removed manually.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the loopback detection process-mode as port-based and
recovery-mode as manual for port 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# loopback-detection config process-mode
port-based recovery-mode manual
27.6 loopback-detection recover
Description
The loopback-detection recover command is used to remove the block
status of selected ports, recovering the blocked ports to normal status,
Syntax
loopback-detection recover
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Recover the blocked port 1/0/2 to normal status:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# loopback-detection recover
225
27.7 show loopback-detection global
Description
The show loopback-detection global command is used to display the global
configuration of loopback detection function such as loopback detection
global status, loopback detection interval and loopback detection recovery
time.
Syntax
show loopback-detection global
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of loopback detection function:
T2500G-10MPS# show loopback-detection global
27.8 show loopback-detection interface
Description
The show loopback-detection interface command is used to display the
configuration of loopback detection function and the status of the specified
Ethernet port.
Syntax
show loopback-detection interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of loopback detection function and the status of all
ports:
226
T2500G-10MPS# show loopback-detection interface
Display the configuration of loopback detection function and the status of
port 5:
T2500G-10MPS# show loopback-detection interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/5
227
Chapter 28 DDM Commands
The DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitoring) function allows the user to monitor the status of the
SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. The user can choose to shut down the
monitoring SFP port automatically when specified parameter exceeds the alarm threshold or
warning threshold. The monitoring parameters include: Temperature, Voltage, Bias Current, Tx
Power and Rx Power.
28.1 ddm state enable
Description
The ddm state enable command is used to enable the DDM function on the
specified SFP port.
Use the no ddm state enable command to disable the DDM function on this
port.
Syntax
ddm state enable
no ddm state enable
Default Setting
Enabled on all the SFP ports.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range
fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)
Example
Enable DDM function on port 1/0/25:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ddm state enable
28.2 ddm shutdown
Description
The ddm shutdown command is used to configure whether to shut down the
port when an exceeding alarm threshold or warning threshold event is
encountered.
228
Syntax
ddm shutdown { none | warning | alarm }
Parameter
none —— The port will never be shut down regardless of the exceeding alarm
threshold and warning threshold events.
warning —— Shut down the port when an exceeding warning threshold event
is encountered.
alarm —— Shut down the port when an exceeding alarm threshold event is
encountered.
Default Setting
none, which means the port will never be shut down regardless of the
exceeding alarm threshold and warning threshold events.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range
fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)
Example
Shut down the port 1/0/25 when an exceeding warning threshold event is
encountered:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ddm shutdown warning
28.3 ddm temperature_threshold
Description
The ddm temperature_threshold command is used to configure the
threshold of the DDM temperature value.
Syntax
ddm temperature_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm |
low_warning }
value
Parameter
high_alarm —— Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the
operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with
the alarm will be taken.
229
high_warning ——Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the
operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with
the warning will be taken.
low_alarm ——Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the
operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with
the alarm will be taken.
low_warning —— Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the
operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with
the warning will be taken.
value
—— Enter the threshold value in Celsius.
Default Setting
None.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range
fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)
Example
Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM temperature on the port 1/0/25
as 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ddm temperature_threshold high_alarm 5
28.4 ddm voltage_threshold
Description
The ddm voltage_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of
the DDM voltage value.
Syntax
ddm voltage_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm |
low_warning }
value
Parameter
high_alarm —— Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the
operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with
the alarm will be taken.
high_warning ——Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the
operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with
the warning will be taken.
230
low_alarm ——Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the
operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with
the alarm will be taken.
low_warning —— Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the
operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with
the warning will be taken.
value
—— Enter the threshold value in Volt.
Default Setting
None.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range
fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)
Example
Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM voltage on the port 1/0/25 as 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ddm voltage_threshold high_alarm 5
28.5 ddm bias_current_threshold
Description
The ddm bias_current_threshold command is used to configure the
threshold of the DDM Bias Current value.
Syntax
ddm bias_current_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm |
low_warning }
value
Parameter
high_alarm —— Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the
operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with
the alarm will be taken.
high_warning ——Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the
operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with
the warning will be taken.
low_alarm ——Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the
operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with
the alarm will be taken.
231
low_warning —— Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the
operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with
the warning will be taken.
value
—— Enter the threshold value in mA.
Default Setting
None.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range
fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)
Example
Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM Bias Current on the port 1/0/25
as 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ddm bias_current_threshold high_alarm 5
28.6 ddm tx_power_threshold
Description
The ddm tx_power_threshold command is used to configure the threshold
of the DDM Tx Power value.
Syntax
ddm tx_power_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm |
low_warning }
value
Parameter
high_alarm —— Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the
operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with
the alarm will be taken.
high_warning ——Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the
operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with
the warning will be taken.
low_alarm ——Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the
operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with
the alarm will be taken.
low_warning —— Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the
operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with
the warning will be taken.
232
value
—— Enter the threshold value in mW.
Default Setting
None.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range
fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)
Example
Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM Tx Power on the port 1/0/25 as 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ddm tx_power_threshold high_alarm 5
28.7 ddm rx_power_threshold
Description
The ddm rx_power_threshold command is used to configure the threshold
of the DDM Rx Power value.
Syntax
ddm rx_power_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm |
low_warning }
value
Parameter
high_alarm —— Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the
operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with
the alarm will be taken.
high_warning ——Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the
operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with
the warning will be taken.
low_alarm ——Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the
operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with
the alarm will be taken.
low_warning —— Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the
operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with
the warning will be taken.
value
—— Enter the threshold value in mW.
Default Setting
None.
233
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range
fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)
Example
Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM Rx Power on the port 1/0/25 as 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#ddm rx_power_threshold high_alarm 5
28.8 show ddm configuration
Description
The show ddm configuration command is used to display the DDM
configuration.
Syntax
show ddm configuration { state | temperature | voltage | bias_current |
tx_power | rx_power }
Parameter
state —— Display the DDM configuration state.
temperature —— Displays the threshold of the DDM temperature value.
voltage —— Displays the threshold of the DDM Voltage value.
bias_current —— Displays the threshold of the DDM Bias Current value.
tx_power
—— Displays the threshold of the DDM Tx Power value.
rx_power
—— Displays the threshold of the DDM Rx Power value.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Example
View the DDM configuration state:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ddm configuration state
View the threshold of the DDM Voltage value:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ddm configuration voltage
234
28.9 show ddm status
Description
The show ddm status command is used to display the DDM status, which is
the digital diagnostic monitoring status of SFP modules inserting into the
switch’s SFP ports.
Syntax
show ddm status
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Example
View the DDM status:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ddm status
235
Chapter 29 ACL Commands
ACL (Access Control List) is used to filter data packets by configuring a series of match
conditions, operations and time ranges. It provides a flexible and secured access control policy
and facilitates you to control the network security.
29.1 time-range
Description
The time-range command is used to add Time-Range. To delete the
corresponding Time-Range, please use no time-range command. A
time-range based ACL enables you to implement ACL control over packets
by differentiating the time-ranges. A time-range can be specified in each rule
in an ACL. The rule takes effect only when the specified time-range is
configured and the system time is within the time-range.
Syntax
time-range
name
no time-range
name
Parameter
name
—— The Time-Range name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add a time-range named tSeg1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# time-range tSeg1
29.2 absolute
Description
The absolute command is used to configure a time-range into an
absoluteness mode. To delete the corresponding Absoluteness Mode
time-range, please use no absolute command.
236
Syntax
absolute start
start-date
end
end-date
no absolute
Parameter
start-date
—— The start date in Absoluteness Mode, in the format of
MM/DD/YYYY. By default, it is 01/01/1970.
end-date
—— The end date in Absoluteness Mode, in the format of
MM/DD/YYYY. By default, it is 12/31/2099. The Absoluteness Mode will be
disabled if the start date and end date are both in default value.
Command Mode
Time-range Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the time-range tSeg1 with time from May 5, 2012 to Oct. 5, 2012:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# time-range tSeg1
T2500G-10MPS(config-time-range)# absolute start 05/05/2012 end
10/05/2012
29.3 periodic
Description
The periodic command is used to configure the time-range into periodic
mode. To delete the corresponding Periodic Mode time-range, please use no
periodic command. To delete the corresponding Periodic Mode week-date
time-range, please use no periodic week-date command. To delete the
corresponding Periodic Mode time-slice time-range, please use no periodic
time-slice command.
Syntax
periodic [week-date
week-day
] [time-slice1
time-slice
] [time-slice2
time-slice
] [time-slice3
time-slice
] [time-slice4
time-slice
]
no periodic
no periodic week-date
no periodic time-slice
237
Parameter
week-day
—— Periodic Mode, in the format of 1-3,6 or daily, weekend,
weekdays. 1-3, 6 represent Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Saturday;
daily represents every day; weekend represents weekend and weekdays
represents working day. By default, the Periodic Mode is disabled.
time-slice
—— Create the time-slice, in the format of HH:MM-HH:MM.
Command Mode
Time-range Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the time-range tSeg1 with time from 8:30 to 12:00 at weekend:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#time-range tSeg1
T2500G-10MPS(config-time-range)#periodic week-date weekend
time-slice1 08:30-12:00
29.4 holiday
Description
The holiday command is used to configure the time-range into Holiday Mode
under Time-range Create Configuration Mode. To delete the corresponding
Holiday Mode time-range, please use no holiday command.
Syntax
holiday
no holiday
Command Mode
Time-range Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the time-range tSeg1 into Holiday Mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#time-range tSeg1
238
T2500G-10MPS(config-time-range)#holiday
29.5 holiday(global)
Description
The holiday command is used to define a holiday. To delete the
corresponding holiday, please use no holiday command.
Syntax
holiday
name
start-date
start-date
end-date
end-date
no holiday
Parameter
name
—— The holiday name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
start-date
—— The start date of the holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for
instance, 05/01.
end-date
—— The end date of the holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for
instance, 05/03.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Define National Day, configuring the start date as October 1st, and the end
date as October 3rd:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#holiday nationalday start-date 10/01 end-date
10/03
29.6 access-list create
Description
The access-list create command is used to create MAC ACL, Standard-IP
ACL and Extend-IP ACL.
Syntax
access-list create
access-list-num
239
Parameter
access-list-num
—— ACL ID, ranging from 0 to 4499. The ID range of the
MAC ACL is 0-499, the Standard-IP ACL is 500-1499 and the Extend-IP ACL
is 1500-2499.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a standard-IP ACL whose ID is 523:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# access-list create 523
29.7 mac access-list
Description
The mac access-list command is used to create MAC ACL. To set the
detailed configurations for a specified MAC ACL, please use mac access-list
command to access Mac Access-list Configuration Mode. To delete the MAC
ACL, please use no mac access-list.
Syntax
mac access-list
access-list-num
no mac access-list
access-list-num
Parameter
access-list-num
—— ACL ID, ranging from 0 to 499.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a MAC ACL whose ID is 423:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# mac access-list 423
240
29.8 access-list standard
Description
The access-list standard command is used to add Standard-IP ACL rule. To
delete the corresponding rule, please use no access-list standard command.
Standard-IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of
match conditions, which can be the source IP addresses and destination IP
addresses carried in the packets.
Syntax
access-list standard
acl-id
rule
rule-id
{ deny
|
permit } [[ sip
source-ip
]
smask
source-ip-mask
] [[ dip
destination-ip
] dmask
destination-ip-mask
]
[ tseg
time-segment
]
no access-list standard
acl-id
rule
rule-id
Parameter
acl-id
—— The desired Standard-IP ACL for configuration.
rule-id
—— The rule ID.
deny —— The operation to discard packets.
permit ——The operation to forward packets. It is the default value.
source-ip
—— The source IP address contained in the rule.
source-ip-mask
—— The source IP address mask. It is required if you typed
the source IP address.
destination-ip
—— The destination IP address contained in the rule.
destination-ip-mask
—— The destination IP address mask. It is required if you
typed the destination IP address.
time-segment
—— The time-range for the rule to take effect. By default, it is
not limited.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a Standard-IP ACL whose ID is 520, and add Rule 10 for it. In the rule,
the source IP address is 192.168.0.100, the source IP address mask is
241
255.255.255.0, the time-range for the rule to take effect is “tRange1”, and the
packets match this rule will be forwarded by the switch:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# access-list create 520
T2500G-10MPS(config)# access-list standard 520 rule 10 permit sip
192.168.0.100 smask 255.255.255.0 tseg tSeg1
29.9 access-list extended
Description
The access-list extended command is used to add Extended-IP ACL rule. To
delete the corresponding rule, please use no access-list extended
command.
Syntax
access-list extended
acl-id
rule
rule-id
{ deny
|
permit } [[ sip
source-ip
]
smask
source-ip-mask
] [[ dip
destination-ip
] dmask
destination-ip-mask
]
[ tseg
time-segment
] [frag {disable | enable}] [ dscp
dscp
] [ s-port
s-port
]
[ d-port
d-port
] [ tcpflag
tcpflag
] [ protocol
protocol
] [ tos
tos
] [ pre
pre
]
no access-list extended
acl-id
rule
rule-id
Parameter
acl-id
——The desired Extended-IP ACL for configuration.
rule-id
—— The rule ID.
deny —— The operation to discard packets.
permit ——The operation to forward packets. It is the default value.
source-ip
—— The source IP address contained in the rule.
source-ip-mask
—— The source IP address mask. It is required if you typed
the source IP address.
destination-ip
—— The destination IP address contained in the rule.
destination-ip-mask
—— The destination IP address mask. It is required if you
typed the destination IP address.
time-segment
—— The time-range for the rule to take effect. By default, it is
not limited.
frag —— Enable/Disable Fragment. By default, it is disabled. If Fragment is
enabled, this rule will process all the fragments and the last piece of fragment
will be always forwarded.
dscp
—— Specify the dscp value, ranging from 0 to 63.
242
s-port
—— The source port number.
d-port
—— The destination port number.
tcpflag
—— Specify the flag value when using TCP protocol.
protocol
—— Configure the value of the matching protocol.
tos
—— Enter the IP ToS contained in the rule.
pre
—— Enter the IP Precedence contained in the rule.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create an Extended-IP ACL whose ID is 2220, and add Rule 10 for it. In the
rule, the source IP address is 192.168.0.100, the source IP address mask is
255.255.255.0, the time-range for the rule to take effect is tSeg1, and the
packets match this rule will be forwarded by the switch:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# access-list create 2220
T2500G-10MPS(config)# access-list extended 2220 rule 10 permit sip
192.168.0.100 smask 255.255.255.0 tseg tSeg1
29.10 rule
Description
The rule command is used to configure MAC ACL rule. To delete the
corresponding rule, please use no rule command.
Syntax
rule
rule-id
{ deny | permit } [[ smac
source-mac
] smask
source-mac-mask
]
[[ dmac
destination-mac
] dmask
destination-mac-mask
] [ vid
vlan-id
] [ type
ethernet-type
] [ pri
user-pri
] [ tseg
time-segment
]
no rule
rule-id
Parameter
rule-id
—— The rule ID.
deny —— The operation to discard packets.
permit ——The operation to forward packets. It is the default value.
243
source-mac
—— The source MAC address contained in the rule.
source-mac-mask
—— The source MAC address mask. It is required if you
typed the source MAC address.
destination-mac
—— The destination MAC address contained in the rule.
destination-mac-mask
—— The destination MAC address mask. It is required
if you typed the destination MAC address.
vlan-id
—— The VLAN ID contained in the rule, ranging from 1 to 4094.
ethernet-type
—— EtherType contained in the rule, in the format of 4-hex
number.
user-pri
—— The user priority contained in the rule, ranging from 0 to 7. By
default, it is not limited.
time-segment
—— The time-range for the rule to take effect. By default, it is
not limited.
Command Mode
MAC Access-list Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a MAC ACL whose ID is 20, and add Rule 10 for it. In the rule, the
source MAC address is 00:01:3F:48:16:23, the source MAC address mask is
11:11:11:11:11:00, VLAN ID is 2, the user priority is 5, the time-range for the
rule to take effect is “tRange1”, and the packets match this rule will be
forwarded by the switch:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# mac access-list 20
T2500G-10MPS(config-mac-acl)# rule 10 permit smac 00:01:3F:48:16:23
smask 11:11:11:11:11:00 vid 2 pri 5 tseg tRange1
29.11 access-list policy name
Description
The access-list policy name command is used to add Policy. To delete the
corresponding Policy, please use no access-list policy name command. A
Policy is used to control the data packets those match the corresponding
ACL rules by configuring ACLs and actions together for effect. The
244
operations here include stream mirror, stream condition, QoS Remarking and
redirect.
Syntax
access-list policy name
name
no access-list policy name
name
Parameter
name
—— The Policy Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add a Policy named policy1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# access-list policy name policy1
29.12 access-list policy action
Description
The access-list policy action command is used to add ACLs and create
actions for the policy. To set the detailed configuration of actions for a policy,
please use access-list policy action command to access Action
Configuration Mode. To delete the corresponding actions, please use no
access-list policy action command.
Syntax
access-list policy action
policy-name
acl-id
no access-list policy action
policy-name
acl-id
Parameter
policy-name
—— The Policy Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
acl-id
—— The ID of the ACL to which the above policy is applied.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
245
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add ACL whose ID is 120 to policy1 and create an action for them:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# access-list policy action policy1 120
29.13 redirect interface
Description
The redirect interface command is used to configure Direction function of
policy action for specified ports.
Syntax
redirect interface { gigabitEthernet
port
}
Parameter
port
—— The Destination Port of Redirect. The data packets matching the
corresponding ACL will be forwarded to the specific port. By default, it is All
Ports.
Command Mode
Action Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Edit the actions for policy1. Forward the data packets matching ACL 120 in
the policy to Gigabit Ethernet port 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#access-list policy action policy1 120
T2500G-10MPS(config-action)#redirect interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
29.14 s-condition
Description
The s-condition command is used to configure Stream Condition function of
policy action.
246
Syntax
s-condition rate
rate
osd { none | discard }
Parameter
rate
—— The rate of Stream Condition, ranging from 0 to 1000000kbps.
osd —— Out of Band disposal of Stream Condition. It is the disposal way of
the data packets those are transmitted beyond the rate. There are two
options, “none” and “discard”. By default, the option is “none”.
Command Mode
Action Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Edit the actions for policy1. For the data packets matching ACL 120 in the
policy, if the rate beyond 1000kbps, they will be discarded by the switch:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#access-list policy action policy1 120
T2500G-10MPS(config-action)#s-condition rate 1000 osd discard
29.15 s-mirror
Description
The s-mirror command is used to configure Stream Mirror function of policy
action to the specified port.
Syntax
s-mirror interface { gigabitEthernet
port
}
Parameter
port
—— The Mirror Port number of Stream Mirror.
Command Mode
Action Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
247
Example
Edit the actions for policy1. Specify the mirror port as Gigabit Ethernet port
1/0/2 for the data packets matching ACL 120:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#access-list policy action policy1 120
T2500G-10MPS(config-action)#s-mirror interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
29.16 qos-remark
Description
The qos-remark command is used to configure QoS Remark function of
policy action.
Syntax
qos-remark [ dscp
dscp
] [ priority
pri
] [dot1p dot1p-pri]
no qos-remark
Parameter
dscp
—— DSCP of QoS Remark. Specify the DSCP region for the data
packets matching the corresponding ACL. DSCP ranges from 0 to 63. By
default, it is not limited.
pri
—— Local Priority of QoS Remark. Specify the local priority for the data
packets matching the corresponding ACL. Local Priority ranges from 0 to 7.
dot1p-pri
—— 802.1P priority of QoS Remark. This remark configuration will
change the data packet's 802.1P priority field to the dot1p-pri you set. 802.1P
priority ranges from 0 to 7.
Command Mode
Action Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Edit the actions for policy1. For the data packets matching ACL 120, specify
the DSCP region as 30 and local priority 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#access-list policy action policy1 120
T2500G-10MPS(config-action)# qos-remark dscp 30 priority 2
248
29.17 access-list bind acl(interface)
Description
The access-list bind acl command is used to bind an ACL to the specified
port. To cancel the bind relation, please use no access-list bind acl
command.
Syntax
access-list bind acl
acl-id
no access-list bind acl
acl-id
Parameter
acl-id
—— The ID of the ACL desired to bind.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind ACL 100 to port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# access-list bind acl 100
29.18 access-list bind acl(vlan)
Description
The access-list bind acl command is used to bind an ACL to the specified
VLAN. To cancel the bind relation, please use no access-list bind acl
command.
Syntax
access-list bind acl
acl-id
no access-list bind acl
acl-id
Parameter
acl-id
—— The ID of the ACL desired to bind.
249
Command Mode
Interface VLAN Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind ACL 100 to VLAN 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# access-list bind acl 100
29.19 access-list bind(interface)
Description
The access-list bind command is used to bind a policy to a specified port. To
cancel the bind relation, please use no access-list bind command.
Syntax
access-list bind
policy-name
no access-list bind
policy-name
Parameter
policy-name
—— The name of the policy desired to bind.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind policy1 to port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# access-list bind policy1
250
29.20 access-list bind(vlan)
Description
The access-list bind command is used to bind a policy to a VLAN. To cancel
the bind relation, please use no access-list bind command.
Syntax
access-list bind
policy-name
no access-list bind
policy-name
Parameter
policy-name
—— The name of the policy desired to bind.
Command Mode
Interface VLAN Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind policy1 to VLAN 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# access-list bind policy1
29.21 show access-list
Description
The show access-list command is used to display configuration of ACL.
Syntax
show access-list
acl-id
Parameter
acl-id
—— The ID of the ACL selected to display the configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of the MAC ACL whose ID is 20:
251
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show access-list 20
29.22 show access-list policy
Description
The show access-list policy command is used to display the information of a
specified policy.
Syntax
show access-list policy
name
Parameter
name
—— The Policy Name desired to show.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of a policy named policy1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show access-list policy policy1
29.23 show access-list bind
Description
The show access-list bind command is used to display the configuration of
Policy bind.
Syntax
show access-list bind
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of Policy bind:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show access-list bind
252
Chapter 30 MSTP Commands
MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol), compatible with both STP and RSTP and subject to
IEEE 802.1s, can disbranch a ring network. STP is to block redundant links and backup links as
well as optimize paths.
30.1 debug spanning-tree
Description
The debug spanning-tree command is used to enable debuggning of
spanning-tree activities. To disable the debugging function, please use no
debug spanning-tree command.
Syntax
debug spanning-tree { all | bpdu receive | bpdu transmit | cmpmsg | errors |
flush | init | migration | proposals | roles | state | tc }
no debug spanning-tree { all | bpdu receive | bpdu transmit | cmpmsg | errors
| flush | init | migration | proposals | roles | state | tc }
Parameters
all —— Display all the spanning-tree debug messages.
bpdu receive —— Display the debug messages of the received
spanning-tree bridge protocol data unit (BPDU).
bpdu transmit —— Display the debug messages of the sent spanning-tree
BPDU.
cmpmsg —— Display the message priority debug messages.
errors —— Display the MSTP error debug messages.
flush —— Display the address table flushing debug messages.
init —— Display the data structure initialization debug messages.
migration —— Display the version migration debug messages.
proposals —— Display the MSTP handshake debug messages.
roles —— Display the MSTP interface role switchling debug messages.
state —— Display the MSTP interface state change debug messages.
tc —— Display the MSTP topology event debug messages.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode
253
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display all the spanning-tree debug messages:
T2500G-10MPS# debug spanning-tree all
30.2 spanning-tree(global)
Description
The spanning-tree command is used to enable STP function globally. To
disable the STP function, please use no spanning-tree command.
Syntax
spanning-tree
no spanning-tree
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the STP function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree
30.3 spanning-tree(interface)
Description
The spanning-tree command is used to enable STP function for a port. To
disable the STP function, please use no spanning-tree command.
Syntax
spanning-tree
no spanning-tree
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
254
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the STP function for port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# spanning-tree
30.4 spanning-tree common-config
Description
The spanning-tree common-config command is used to configure the
parameters of the ports for comparison in the CIST and the common
parameters of all instances. To return to the default configuration, please use
no spanning-tree common-config command. CIST (Common and Internal
Spanning Tree) is the spanning tree in a switched network, connecting all
devices in the network.
Syntax
spanning-tree common-config [ port-priority
pri
] [ ext-cost
ext-cost
]
[ int-cost
int-cost
] [ portfast { enable | disable }] [ point-to-point { auto | open
| close }]
no spanning-tree common-config
Parameter
pri
—— Port Priority, which must be multiple of 16 ranging from 0 to 240. By
default, the port priority is 128. Port Priority is an important criterion on
determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the root port.
In the same condition, the port with the highest priority will be chosen as the
root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
ext-cost
—— External Path Cost, which is used to choose the path and
calculate the path costs of ports in different MST regions. It is an important
criterion on determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
It ranges from o to 2000000. By default, it is 0 which is mean auto.
int-cost
—— Internal Path Cost, which is used to choose the path and
calculate the path costs of ports in an MST region. It is an important criterion
on determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority. By
255
default, it is automatic. It ranges from o to 2000000. By default, it is 0 which is
mean auto.
portfast —— Enable/ Disable Edge Port. By default, it is disabled. The edge
port can transit its state from blocking to forwarding rapidly without waiting
for forward delay.
point-to-point —— The P2P link status, with auto, open and close options. By
default, the option is auto. If the two ports in the P2P link are root port or
designated port, they can transit their states to forwarding rapidly to reduce
the unnecessary forward delay.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the STP function of port 1, and configure the Port Priority as 64,
ExtPath Cost as 100, IntPath Cost as 100, and then enable Edge Port:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# spanning-tree common-config port-priority 64
ext-cost 100 int-cost 100 portfast enable point-to-point open
30.5 spanning-tree mode
Description
The spanning-tree mode command is used to configure the STP mode of the
switch. To return to the default configurations, please use no spanning-tree
mode command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mode { stp | rstp | mstp }
no spanning-tree mode
Parameter
stp ——Spanning Tree Protocol, the default value.
rstp ——Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
mstp ——Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
256
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the spanning-tree mode as mstp:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree mode mstp
30.6 spanning-tree mst configuration
Description
The spanning-tree mst configuration command is used to access MST
Configuration Mode from Global Configuration Mode, as to configure the
VLAN-Instance mapping, region name and revision level. To return to the
default configuration of the corresponding Instance, please use no
spanning-tree mst configuration command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst configuration
no spanning-tree mst configuration
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enter into the MST configuration mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T2500G-10MPS(Config-mst)#
30.7 instance
Description
The instance command is used to configure the VLAN-Instance mapping. To
remove the VLAN-instance mapping or disable the corresponding instance,
257
please use no instance command. When an instance is disabled, the related
mapping VLANs will be removed.
Syntax
instance
instance-id
vlan
vlan-id
no instance
instance-id
[ vlan
vlan-id
]
Parameters
instance-id
—— Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8.
vlan-id
—— The VLAN ID selected to mapping with the corresponding
instance.
Command Mode
MST Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Map the VLANs 1-100 to Instance 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T2500G-10MPS(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 1-100
Disable Instance 1, namely remove all the mapping VLANs 1-100:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T2500G-10MPS(config-mst)# no instance 1
Remove VLANs 1-50 in mapping VLANs 1-100 for Instance 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T2500G-10MPS(config-mst)# no instance 1 vlan 1-50
30.8 name
Description
The name command is used to configure the region name of MST instance.
Syntax
name
name
258
Parameters
name
—— The region name, used to identify MST region. It ranges from 1 to
32 characters.
Command Mode
MST Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the region name of MST as “region1”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T2500G-10MPS(config-mst)# name region1
30.9 revision
Description
The revision command is used to configure the revision level of MST
instance.
Syntax
revision
revision
Parameters
revision
—— The revision level for MST region identification, ranging from 0
to 65535.
Command Mode
MST Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the revision level of MST as 100:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
T2500G-10MPS(config-mst)# revision 100
259
30.10 spanning-tree mst instance
Description
The spanning-tree mst instance command is used to configure the priority
of MST instance. To return to the default value of MST instance priority,
please use no spanning-tree mst instance command.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance
instance-id
priority
pri
no spanning-tree mst instance
instance-id
priority
Parameter
instance-id
—— Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8.
pri
—— MSTI Priority, which must be multiple of 4096 ranging from 0 to
61440. By default, it is 32768. MSTI priority is an important criterion on
determining if the switch will be chosen as the root bridge in the specific
instance.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the MST Instance 1 and configure its priority as 4096:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree mst instance 1 priority 4096
30.11 spanning-tree mst
Description
The spanning-tree mst command is used to configure MST Instance Port. To
return to the default configuration of the corresponding Instance Port, please
use no spanning-tree mst command. A port can play different roles in
different spanning tree instance. You can use this command to configure the
parameters of the ports in different instance IDs as well as view status of the
ports in the specified instance.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance
instance-id
{[ port-priority
pri
] | [ cost
cost
]}
260
no spanning-tree mst instance
instance-id
Parameter
instance-id
—— Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8.
pri
—— Port Priority, which must be multiple of 16 ranging from 0 to 240. By
default, it is 128. Port Priority is an important criterion on determining if the
port will be chosen as the root port by the device connected to this port.
cost
—— Path Cost, ranging from 0 to 200000. The lower value has the
higher priority. Its default value is 0 meaning “auto”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the priority of port 1 in MST Instance 1 as 64, and path cost as
2000:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# spanning-tree mst instance 1 port-priority 64
cost 2000
30.12 spanning-tree priority
Description
The spanning-tree priority command is used to configure the bridge priority.
To return to the default value of bridge priority, please use no spanning-tree
priority command.
Syntax
spanning-tree priority
pri
no spanning-tree priority
Parameter
pri
—— Bridge priority, ranging from 0 to 61440. It is 32768 by default.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
261
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the bridge priority as 4096:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree priority 4096
30.13 spanning-tree timer
Description
The spanning-tree timer command is used to configure forward-time,
hello-time and max-age of Spanning Tree. To return to the default
configurations, please use no spanning-tree timer command.
Syntax
spanning-tree timer {[ forward-time
forward-time
] [ hello-time
hello-time
]
[ max-age
max-age
]}
no spanning-tree timer
Parameter
forward-time
—— Forward Delay, which is the time for the port to transit its
state after the network topology is changed. Forward Delay ranges from 4 to
30 in seconds and it is 15 by default. Otherwise, 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >=
Max Age.
hello-time
——Hello Time, which is the interval to send BPDU packets, and
used to test the links. Hello Time ranges from 1 to 10 in seconds and it is 2 by
default. Otherwise, 2 * (Hello Time + 1) <= Max Age.
max-age
—— The maximum time the switch can wait without receiving a
BPDU before attempting to reconfigure, ranging from 6 to 40 in seconds. By
default, it is 20.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure forward-time, hello-time and max-age for Spanning Tree as 16
seconds, 3 seconds and 22 seconds respectively:
262
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree timer forward-time 16 hello-time 3
max-age 22
30.14 spanning-tree hold-count
Description
The spanning-tree hold-count command is used to configure the maximum
number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time interval. To return to the
default configurations, please use no spanning-tree hold-count command.
Syntax
spanning-tree hold-count
value
no spanning-tree hold-count
Parameter
value
—— The maximum number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time
interval, ranging from 1 to 20 in pps. By default, it is 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the hold-count of STP as 8pps:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree hold-count 8
30.15 spanning-tree max-hops
Description
The spanning-tree max-hops command is used to configure the maximum
number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded.
To return to the default configurations, please use no spanning-tree
max-hops command.
Syntax
spanning-tree max-hops
value
no spanning-tree max-hops
263
Parameter
value
—— The maximum number of hops that occur in a specific region
before the BPDU is discarded, ranging from 1 to 40 in hop. By default, it is 20.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the max-hops of STP as 30:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# spanning-tree max-hops 30
30.16 spanning-tree bpdufilter
Description
The spanning-tree bpdufilter command is used to enable the BPDU filter
function for a port. With the function enabled, the port can be prevented from
receiving and sending any BPDU packets. To disable the BPDU filter function,
please use no spanning-tree bpdufilter command.
Syntax
spanning-tree bpdufilter
no spanning-tree bpdufilter
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the BPDU filter function for port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# spanning-tree bpdufilter
264
30.17 spanning-tree bpduguard
Description
The spanning-tree bpduguard command is used to enable the BPDU protect
function for a port. With the BPDU protect function enabled, the port will set
itself automatically as ERROR-PORT when it receives BPDU packets, and the
port will disable the forwarding function for a while. To disable the BPDU
protect function, please use no spanning-tree bpduguard command.
Syntax
spanning-tree bpduguard
no spanning-tree bpduguard
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the BPDU protect function for port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# spanning-tree bpduguard
30.18 spanning-tree guard loop
Description
The spanning-tree guard loop command is used to enable the Loop Protect
function for a port. Loop Protect is to prevent the loops in the network
brought by recalculating STP because of link failures and network
congestions. To disable the Loop Protect function, please use no
spanning-tree guard loop command.
Syntax
spanning-tree guard loop
no spanning-tree guard loop
265
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Loop Protect function for port 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# spanning-tree guard loop
30.19 spanning-tree guard root
Description
The spanning-tree guard root command is used to enable the Root Protect
function for a port. With the Root Protect function enabled, the root bridge
will set itself automatically as ERROR-PORT when receiving BPDU packets
with higher priority, in order to maintain the role of root ridge. To disable the
Root Protect function, please use no spanning-tree guard root command.
Syntax
spanning-tree guard root
no spanning-tree guard root
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Root Protect function for port 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# spanning-tree guard root
266
30.20 spanning-tree guard tc
Description
The spanning-tree guard tc command is used to enable the TC Protect of
Spanning Tree function for a port. To disable the TC Protect of Spanning Tree
function, please use no spanning-tree guard tc command. A switch removes
MAC address entries upon receiving TC-BPDUs. If a malicious user
continuously sends TC-BPDUs to a switch, the switch will be busy with
removing MAC address entries, which may decrease the performance and
stability of the network. With the Protect of Spanning Tree function enabled,
you can configure the number of TC-BPDUs in a required time, so as to avoid
the process of removing MAC addresses frequently.
Syntax
spanning-tree guard tc
no spanning-tree guard tc
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the TC Protect of Spanning Tree for port 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# spanning-tree guard tc
30.21 spanning-tree mcheck
Description
The spanning-tree mcheck command is used to enable mcheck.
Syntax
spanning-tree mcheck
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
267
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable mcheck for port 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# spanning-tree mcheck
30.22 show spanning-tree active
Description
The show spanning-tree active command is used to display the active
information of spanning-tree.
Syntax
show spanning-tree active
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the active information of spanning-tree:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show spanning-tree active
30.23 show spanning-tree bridge
Description
The show spanning-tree bridge command is used to display the bridge
parameters.
Syntax
show spanning-tree bridge [ forward-time | hello-time | hold-count | max-age
| max-hops | mode | priority | state ]
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
268
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the bridge parameters:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show spanning-tree bridge
30.24 show spanning-tree interface
Description
The show spanning-tree interface command is used to display the
spanning-tree information of all ports or a specified port.
Syntax
show spanning-tree interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
] [ edge | ext-cost | int-cost | mode | p2p | priority | role | state |
status ]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the spanning-tree information of all ports:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show spanning-tree interface
Display the spanning-tree information of port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show spanning-tree interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/2
Display the spanning-tree mode information of port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show spanning-tree interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/2 mode
269
30.25 show spanning-tree interface-security
Description
The show spanning-tree interface-security command is used to display the
protect information of all ports or a specified port.
Syntax
show spanning-tree interface-security [ gigabitEthernet
port
|
port-channel
port-channel-id
] [ bpdufilter | bpduguard | loop | root | tc |
tc-defend ]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the protect information of all ports:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security
Display the protect information of port 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Display the interface security bpdufilter information:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security
bpdufilter
30.26 show spanning-tree mst
Description
The show spanning-tree mst command is used to display the related
information of MST Instance.
Syntax
show spanning-tree mst { configuration [ digest ] | instance
instance-id
[ interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
| port-channel
port-channel-id
] ] }
270
Parameter
instance-id
—— Instance ID desired to show, ranging from 1 to 8.
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channel.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the region information and mapping information of VLAN and MST
Instance:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show spanning-tree mst configuration
Display the related information of MST Instance 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show spanning-tree mst instance 1
Display all the ports information of MST Instance 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show spanning-tree mst instance 1 interface
271
Chapter 31 DLDP Commands
DLDP (Device Link Detection Protocol) is used to monitor the link state of fiber-optic or
twisted-pair Ethernet cables. When a unidirectional link is detected, the corresponding port will
be shut down automatically or manually (depending on the shut mode configured).
31.1 dldp(global)
Description
The dldp command is used to enable the DLDP function globally. To disable it,
please use no dldp command.
Syntax
dldp
no dldp
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the DLDP function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# dldp
31.2 dldp interval
Description
The dldp interval command is used to define the interval of sending
advertisement packets on ports that are in the advertisement state.
Syntax
dldp interval
interval-time
Parameter
interval-time
—— The interval of sending advertisement packets. It ranges
from 1 to 30 seconds. By default, it is 5 seconds.
272
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the interval of sending advertisement packets as 10 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# dldp interval 10
31.3 dldp shut-mode
Description
The dldp shut-mode command is used to configure the shutdown mode
when a unidirectional link is detected.
Syntax
dldp shut-mode { auto
|
manual
}
Parameter
auto —— The switch automatically shuts down ports when a unidirectional
link is detected. By default, the shut-mode is auto
.
manual ——The switch displays an alert when a unidirectional link is detected.
The operation to shut down the unidirectional link ports is accomplished by
the users.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the shut-mode
as manual:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# dldp shut-mode manual
273
31.4 dldp reset(global)
Description
The dldp reset command is used to reset all the unidirectional links and
restart the link detect process.
Syntax
dldp reset
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Reset the DLDP function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# dldp reset
31.5 dldp(interface)
Description
The dldp command is used to enable the DLDP function of the specified port.
To disable it, please use no dldp command.
Syntax
dldp
no dldp
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the DLDP function of ports 1/0/2-4:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4
274
T2500G-10MPS (config-if-range)# dldp
31.6 dldp reset(interface)
Description
The dldp reset command is used to reset the specified port and restart the
link detect process.
Syntax
dldp reset
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Reset the DLDP function of ports 2-4:
T2500G-10MPS (config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4
T2500G-10MPS (config-if-range)# dldp reset
31.7 show dldp
Description
The show dldp command is used to display the global configuration of DLDP
function such as DLDP global state, DLDP interval and shut mode.
Syntax
show dldp
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
275
Example
Display the global configuration of DLDP function:
T2500G-10MPS# show dldp
31.8 show dldp interface
Description
The show dldp interface command is used to display the configuration and
state of the specified Ethernet port. By default, the configuration and state of
all the ports will be displayed.
Syntax
show dldp interface [gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
—— The Gigabit Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration and state of all ports:
T2500G-10MPS# show dldp interface
Display the configuration and state of port 1/0/5:
T2500G-10MPS# show dldp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5
276
Chapter 32 IGMP Snooping Commands
IGMP Snooping (Internet Group Management Protocol Snooping) is a multicast control
mechanism running on Layer 2 switch. It can effectively prevent multicast groups being
broadcasted in the network.
32.1 ip igmp snooping(global)
Description
The ip igmp snooping command is used to configure IGMP Snooping
globally. To disable the IGMP Snooping function, please use no ip igmp
snooping command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping
no ip igmp snooping
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable IGMP Snooping function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping
32.2 ip igmp snooping(interface)
Description
The ip igmp snooping command is used to enable the IGMP Snooping
function for the desired port. To disable the IGMP Snooping function, please
use no ip igmp snooping command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping
no ip igmp snooping
277
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable IGMP Snooping function of port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ip igmp snooping
32.3 ip igmp snooping rtime
Description
The ip igmp snooping rtime command is used to specify router port aging
time globally. To restore the default timer, please use no ip igmp snooping
rtime command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping rtime
rtime
no ip igmp snooping rtime
Parameter
rtime
—— Specify the aging time in seconds, ranging from 60 to 600. The
default aging time is 300 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify IGMP Snooping router port aging time as 100 seconds globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping rtime 100
278
32.4 ip igmp snooping mtime
Description
The ip igmp snooping mtime command is used to specify member port
aging time globally. The default aging time is 260 seconds. To restore the
default timer, please use no ip igmp snooping mtime command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping mtime
mtime
no ip igmp snooping mtime
Parameter
mtime
—— Specify the aging time in seconds, ranging from 60 to 600. The
default aging time is 260 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify IGMP Snooping member port aging time as 100 seconds globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping mtime 100
32.5 ip igmp snooping report-suppression
Description
The ip igmp snooping report-suppression command is used enable the
IGMP report suppression function. When it is enabled, the switch forwards
only the first IGMP report message per mulicast group to the Layer 3 device,
and the subsequent IGMP reports from the same multicast group are
discarded. To disable the IGMP report suppression function and forward all
the IGMP reports to the Layer 3 device, please use no ip igmp snooping
report-suppression command. This function is disabled by default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping report-suppression
no ip igmp snooping report-suppression
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
279
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IGMP report suppression function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping report-suppression
32.6 ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
Description
The ip igmp snooping immediate-leave command is used to configure the
Fast Leave function for port. To disable the Fast Leave function, please use
no ip igmp snooping immediate-leave command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
no ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the Fast Leave function for port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
32.7 ip igmp snooping drop-unknown
Description
The ip igmp snooping drop-unknown command is used to process the
unknown multicast as discard. To disable the operation of processing the
unknown multicast as discard, please use no ip igmp snooping
drop-unknown command.
280
Syntax
ip igmp snooping drop-unknown
no ip igmp snooping drop-unknown
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the operation to process unknown multicast as discard:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping drop-unknown
32.8 ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval
Description
The ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval command is used to
specify the interval to send Specific Query Message. The default value is 1
second. To restore the default interval, please use no ip igmp snooping
last-listener query-inteval command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval
interval
no ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval
Parameter
interval
—— Specify the interval to send Specific Query Message in seconds,
ranging from 1 to 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the interval of Specific Query Message to 3 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval 3
281
32.9 ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count
Description
The ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count command is used to
specify the numbers of Specific Query Message to be sent. The default value
is 2. To restore the default number, please use no ip igmp snooping
last-listener query-count command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count
num
no ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count
Parameter
num
—— Specify the numbers of Specific Query Message to be sent, ranging
from 1 to 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the number of Specific Query Message to 3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count 3
32.10 ip igmp snooping vlan-config
Description
The ip igmp snooping vlan-config command is used to enable VLAN IGMP
Snooping function or to modify IGMP Snooping parameters, and to create
static multicast IP entry. To disable the VLAN IGMP Snooping function, please
use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config command. To restore the default
values, please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config with specified
parameters.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
[ rtime
router-time
| mtime
member-time
| rport interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
]
ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
static
ip
interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
282
no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
[ rtime
router-time
| mtime
member-time
| rport interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
]
no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
static
ip
interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
router-time
—— Router Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not
receive IGMP query message from the router port, it will consider this port is
not a router port any more. Router Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in
seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global router-time will be used.
member-time
—— Member Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not
receive IGMP report message from the member port, it will consider this port
is not a member port any more. Member Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in
seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global member-time will be used.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channels.
ip
—— The static multicast IP address.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IGMP Snooping function and modify Router Port Time as 300
seconds, Member Port Time as 200 seconds for VLAN 1-3, and set the router
port as 1/0/1 for VLAN 1-2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 rtime 300
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 mtime 200
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-2 rport interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Add static multicast IP address 225.0.0.1, which corresponds to VLAN 2, and
configure the forward ports as ports 1/0/1-3:
283
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 2 static 225.0.0.1
interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
32.11 ip igmp snooping vlan-config
(router-port-forbidden)
Description
This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in
the specified VLAN(s). To delete the forbidden router ports, please use no ip
igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-ports-forbidd command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-port-forbidd interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
no ip igmp snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-port-forbidd interface
[ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
port-list
—— Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent
from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded.
port-channel-id
—— Forbid the specified port-channels as being router ports.
Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be discarded.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in VLAN 1 :
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1
router-port-forbidd interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
284
32.12 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config
Description
The ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config command is used to create
Multicast VLAN. To delete the corresponding Multicast VLAN, please use no
ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config command. To restore the default values,
please use no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config with specified
parameters.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config [
vlan-id
] [ rtime
router-time
| mtime
member-time
| rport interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
]
no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config [ rtime
router-time
| mtime
member-time
| rport interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
]
Parameter
vlan-id
—— The ID of the multicast VLAN desired to create or modify, ranging
from 2 to 4094. If not specified, the default multicast VLAN will be selected.
router-time
—— Router Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not
receive IGMP query message from the router port, it will consider this port is
not a router port any more. Router Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in
seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global router-time will be used.
member-time
—— Member Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not
receive IGMP report message from the member port, it will consider this port
is not a member port any more. Member Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in
seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global member-time will be used.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channels.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable Multicast VLAN 3, and configure Router Port Time as 100 seconds,
Member Port Time 100 seconds, and Static Router Port port 1/0/3:
285
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config 3 rtime 100
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config 3 mtime 100
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config 3 rport
interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
32.13 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config
(router-port-forbidden)
Description
This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in
the specified multicast VLAN. To delete the forbidden router ports, please
use no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config router-ports-forbidd command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config [
vlan-id
] router-port-forbidd interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config router-port-forbidd [ interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
]
Parameter
vlan-id
—— The ID of the multicast VLAN.
port-list
—— Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent
from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded.
port-channel-id
—— Forbid the specified port-channels as being router ports.
Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be discarded.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in multicast VLAN 1 :
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config 1
router-port-forbidd interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
286
32.14 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config
(source-ip-replace)
Description
This command is used to replace the multicast source IP address of the IGMP
packets in the specified multicast VLAN. To delete the forbidden router ports,
please use no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config replace-sourceip
command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config [
vlan-id
] replace-sourceip
ip
no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config replace-sourceip
Parameter
vlan-id
—— The ID of the multicast VLAN.
ip
—— Specify the IP address. The switch will use this IP address to replace
the source IP address of the IGMP packets.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Replace the source IP address of the IGMP packets in multicast VLAN 1 as
192.168.0.112:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config 1
replace-sourceip 192.168.0.112
32.15 ip igmp snooping querier vlan
Description
The ip igmp snooping querier vlan command is used to enable the IGMP
Snooping Querier function of the VLAN(s). To disable the IGMP Snooping
Querier function of certain VLANs, please use no ip igmp snooping querier
vlan command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping querier vlan
vlan-id
287
no ip igmp snooping querier vlan
vlan-id
Parameter
vlan-id
— VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the IGMP Snooping Querier function of VLAN 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ip igmp snooping querier vlan 1
32.16 ip igmp snooping querier vlan (general query)
Description
The ip igmp snooping querier vlan command is used to configure the
parameters for IGMP Snooping Querier to send a general query frame. To
return to the default configuration, please use no ip igmp snooping querier
vlan command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping querier vlan
vlan-id
{ query-interval
interval |
max-response-time
response-time |
general-query source-ip
ip-addr
}
no ip igmp snooping querier vlan
vlan-id
{ query-interval
|
max-response-time
|
general-query source-ip }
Parameter
vlan-id
—— VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
interval
—— The time interval to send a general query frame by IGMP
Snooping Querier, ranging from 10 to 300 (seconds). By default, it is 60
seconds.
response-time
—— The maximal time for the host to respond to a general
query frame, ranging from 1 to 25 (seconds). By default, it is 10 Seconds.
ip-addr
—— The source IP of the general query frame sent by IGMP Snooping
Querier. It should not be a multicast IP or a broadcast IP. By default, it is
192.168.0.1.
288
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
For VLAN 2, specify its query-interval as 200 seconds, and the response-time
as 20 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ip igmp snooping querier vlan 2 query-interval
200
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ip igmp snooping querier vlan 2
max-response-time 20
32.17 ip igmp snooping max-groups
Description
The ip igmp snooping max-groups command is used to configure the
maximum number of groups that a port can join in. The ip igmp snooping
max-groups action is used to configure the action that the port takes when it
receives an IGMP report message and the maximum number of entries is in
the forwarding table. To remove the maximum group limitation and return to
the default of no limitation on the specified port, please use the no ip igmp
snooping max-groups command. To return to the default action of dropping
the report, please use the no ip igmp snooping max-groups action
command. These commands only apply to the dynamic multicast groups.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping max-groups [
maxgroup
]
ip igmp snooping max-groups action { drop | replace }
no ip igmp snooping max-groups
no ip igmp snooping max-groups action
Parameter
maxgroup
—— Specify the maximum numbers of groups that the port can
join. It ranges from 0 to 1000 and the default value is 1000.
drop
—— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins
has exceeded the max-group, the port will not join any new multicast group.
289
replace
—— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port
joins has exceeded the max-group, the newly joined multicast group will
replace an existing multicast group with the lowest multicast group address.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the maximum numbers of groups that ports 1/0/2-5 can join as 10,
and configure the throttling action as replace:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)#ip igmp snooping max-groups 10
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)#ip igmp snooping max-groups action
replace
32.18 ip igmp snooping authentication
Description
The ip igmp snooping authenticaiton command is used to authenticate the
users who want to join the limited multicast source. To disable the multicast
authentication, please use no ip igmp snooping authentication command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping authentication
no ip igmp snooping authentication
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
290
User Guidelines
The IGMP Authentication feature will take effect only when AAA function is
enabled and the RADIUS server is configured. For how to enable AAA function
and configure RADIUS server, please refer to aaa enable and radius-server
host.
Example
Enable IGMP authentication on port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ip igmp snooping authentication
32.19 ip igmp snooping accounting
Description
The ip igmp snooping accounting command is used to enable IGMP
accounting globally. To disable the IGMP accouting, please use no ip igmp
snooping accounting command.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping accounting
no ip igmp snooping accounting
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable IGMP accounting globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp snooping accounting
32.20 ip igmp profile
Description
The ip igmp profile command is used to create the configuration profile. To
delete the corresponding profile, please use no ip igmp profile command.
291
Syntax
ip igmp profile
id
no ip igmp profile
id
Parameter
id
—— Specify the id of the configuration profile, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create the profile 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp profile 1
32.21 deny
Description
The deny command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as deny.
Syntax
deny
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as deny:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp profile 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-igmp-profile)#deny
292
32.22 permit
Description
The permit command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as
permit.
Syntax
permit
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as permit:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp profile 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-igmp-profile)#permit
32.23 range
Description
The range command is used to configure the range of the profile’s filtering
multicast address. To delete the corresponding filtering multicast address,
please use no range command. A profile contains 16 filtering IP-range entries
at most.
Syntax
range
start-ip
end-ip
no range
start-ip
end-ip
Parameter
start-ip
—— The start filtering multicast IP address.
end-ip
—— The end filtering multicast IP address.
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
293
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure one of the filter multicast address entry as range 225.1.1.1 to
226.3.2.1 in profile 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip igmp profile 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-igmp-profile)#range 225.1.1.1 226.3.2.1
32.24 ip igmp filter
Description
The ip igmp filter command is used to bind the specified profile to the
interface. To delete the binding, please use no ip igmp filter command.
Syntax
ip igmp filter
profile-id
no ip igmp filter
Parameter
profile-id
—— Specify the profile ID, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind profile 1 to interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ip igmp filter 1
32.25 clear ip igmp snooping statistics
Description
The clear ip igmp snooping statistics command is used to clear the
statistics of the IGMP packets.
294
Syntax
clear ip igmp snooping statistics
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear the statistics of the IGMP packets:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# clear ip igmp snooping statistics
32.26 show ip igmp snooping
Description
The show ip igmp snooping command is used to display the global
configuration of IGMP snooping.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of IGMP:
T2500G-10MPS# show ip igmp snooping
32.27 show ip igmp snooping interface
Description
The show ip igmp snooping interface command is used to display the port
configuration of IGMP snooping.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet [
port
|
port-list
] ]
{ basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat }
295
show ip igmp snooping interface [ port-channel [
port-channel-id
] ]
{ basic-config | max-groups }
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat —— The related configuration
information selected to display.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IGMP baisic configuration configuration of all ports and port
channels:
T2500G-10MPS# show ip igmp snooping interface basic-config
Display the IGMP basic configuration of port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS# show ip igmp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
basic-config
Display the IGMP packet statistics of ports 1/0/1-4:
T2500G-10MPS# show ip igmp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-4
packet-stat
32.28 show ip igmp snooping vlan
Description
The show ip igmp snooping vlan command is used to display the VLAN
configuration of IGMP snooping.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping vlan [
vlan-id
]
Parameter
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID selected to display.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
296
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the IGMP snooping configuration information of VLAN 2:
T2500G-10MPS# show ip igmp snooping vlan 2
32.29 show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan
Description
The show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan command is used to display the
Multicast VLAN configuration.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the Multicast VLAN configuration:
T2500G-10MPS# show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan
32.30 show ip igmp snooping groups
Description
The show ip igmp snooping groups command is used to display the
information of all IGMP snooping groups. It can be extended to some other
commands to display the dynamic and static multicast information of a
selected VLAN.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping groups [ vlan {
vlan-id
} ]
[
multicast_addr
| count |
dynamic | dynamic count | static | static count ]
Parameter
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID selected to display the information of all multicast
items.
multicast_addr
—— IP address of the multicast group.
297
count—— The numbers of all multicast groups.
dynamic—— Display dynamic multicast groups.
dynamic count—— The numbers of all dynamic multicast groups.
static—— Display static multicast groups.
static count—— The numbers of all static multicast groups.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the information of all IGMP snooping groups:
T2500G-10MPS#show ip igmp snooping groups
Display all the multicast entries in VLAN 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5
Display the count of multicast entries in VLAN 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 count
Display the dynamic multicast groups of VLAN 5
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 dynamic
Display the static multicast groups of VLAN 5
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 static
Display the count of dynamic multicast entries of VLAN 5
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 dynamic
count
Display the count of static multicast entries of VLAN 5
T2500G-10MPS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 static count
32.31 show ip igmp snooping querier
Description
The show ip igmp snooping querier command is used to display the Querier
configuration of VLAN.
298
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping querier [ vlan
vlan-id
]
Parameter
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID selected to display, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display all Querier information:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ip igmp snooping querier
32.32 show ip igmp profile
Description
The show ip igmp profile command is used to display the configuration
information of all the profiles or a specific profile.
Syntax
show ip igmp profile [
id
]
Parameter
id
—— Specify the ID of the profile, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration information of all profiles:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ip igmp profile
299
Chapter 33 MLD Snooping Commands
MLD Snooping (Multicast Listener Discovery Snooping) is a multicast control mechanism
running on Layer 2 switch. It can effectively prevent multicast groups being broadcasted in the
IPv6 network.
33.1 ipv6 mld snooping(global)
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping command is used to enable MLD Snooping function
globally. If this function is disabled, all related MLD Snooping function would
not work. To disable this function, please use no ipv6 mld snooping
command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping
no ipv6 mld snooping
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable MLD Snooping:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping
33.2 ipv6 mld snooping(interface)
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping command is used to enable MLD Snooping function
on the desired port. To disable this function, please use no ipv6 mld
snooping command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping
no ipv6 mld snooping
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
300
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable MLD Snooping on port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping
33.3 ipv6 mld snooping rtime
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping rtime command is used to specify router port aging
time globally. To restore the default timer, please use no ipv6 mld snooping
rtime command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping rtime
rtime
no ipv6 mld snooping rtime
Parameter
rtime
—— Specify the aging time in seconds, ranging from 60 to 600. The
default aging time is 300 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify MLD Snooping router port aging time as 100 seconds globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping rtime 100
33.4 ipv6 mld snooping mtime
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping mtime command is used to specify member port
aging time globally. The default aging time is 260 seconds. To restore the
default timer, please use no ipv6 mld snooping mtime command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping mtime
mtime
no ipv6 mld snooping mtime
301
Parameter
mtime
—— Specify the aging time in seconds, ranging from 60 to 600. The
default aging time is 260 seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify MLD Snooping member port aging time as 100 seconds globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping mtime 100
33.5 ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression command is used enable the
MLD report suppression function. When it is enabled, the switch forwards
only the first MLD report message per mulicast group to the Layer 3 device,
and the subsequent MLD reports from the same multicast group are
discarded. To disable the MLD report suppression function and forward all
the MLD reports to the Layer 3 device, please use no ip igmp snooping
report-suppression command. This function is disabled by default.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression
no ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable MLD Report message suppression function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression
302
33.6 ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave command is used to configure the
Fast Leave function for port. To disable the Fast Leave function, please use
no ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
no ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the Fast Leave function for port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave
33.7 ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown command is used to enable the
unknown multicast packets filter function. To disable this function, please use
no ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown command. By default, it is disabled.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown
no ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable unknown multicast filter function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown
303
33.8 ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval command is used to
specify the interval to send Specific Query Message. The default value is 1
second. To restore the default interval, please use no ipv6 mld snooping
last-listener query-inteval command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval
interval
no ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval
Parameter
interval
—— Specify the interval to send Specific Query Message in seconds,
ranging from 1 to 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the interval of Specific Query Message to 3 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval 3
33.9 ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count command is used to
specify the numbers of Specific Query Message to be sent. The default value
is 2. To restore the default number, please use no ipv6 mld snooping
last-listener query-count command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count
num
no ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count
Parameter
num
—— Specify the numbers of Specific Query Message to be sent, ranging
from 1 to 5.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
304
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the number of Specific Query Message to 3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count 3
33.10 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config command is used to enable VLAN MLD
Snooping function or to modify MLD Snooping parameters, and to create
static multicast IP entry. To disable the VLAN MLD Snooping function, please
use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
[ rtime
router-time
| mtime
member-time
| rport interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
]
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
static
ip
interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
[ rtime
router-time
| mtime
member-time
| rport interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
]
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
static
ip
interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
router-time
—— Router Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not
receive IGMP query message from the router port, it will consider this port is
not a router port any more. Router Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in
seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global router-time will be used.
member-time
—— Member Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not
receive IGMP report message from the member port, it will consider this port
is not a member port any more. Member Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in
seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global member-time will be used.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
305
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channels.
ip
—— The static multicast IP address.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the MLD Snooping function and modify Router Port Time as 300
seconds, Member Port Time as 200 seconds for VLAN 1-3, and set the router
port as 1/0/1 for VLAN 1-2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3 rtime 300
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3 mtime 200
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-2 rport interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
Add static multicast IP address ff01::1234:01, which corresponds to VLAN 2,
and configure the forward ports as ports 1/0/1-3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 2 static
ff01::1234:01 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
33.11 ip mld snooping vlan-config
(router-port-forbidden)
Description
This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in
the specified VLAN(s). To delete the forbidden router ports, please use no
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-ports-forbidd command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-port-forbidd interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config
vlan-id-list
router-port-forbidd interface
[ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
]
306
Parameter
vlan-id-list
—— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration,
ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.
port-list
—— Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent
from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded.
port-channel-id
—— Forbid the specified port-channels as being router ports.
Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be discarded.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in VLAN 1 :
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1
router-port-forbidd interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
33.12 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config command is used to create
Multicast VLAN. To delete the corresponding Multicast VLAN, please use no
ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config command. To restore the default
values, please use no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config with specified
parameters.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config [
vlan-id
] [ rtime
router-time
| mtime
member-time
| rport interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
]
no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config [ rtime
router-time
| mtime
member-time
| rport interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
]
Parameter
vlan-id
—— The ID of the multicast VLAN desired to create or modify, ranging
from 2 to 4094. If not specified, the default multicast VLAN will be selected.
307
router-time
—— Router Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not
receive IGMP query message from the router port, it will consider this port is
not a router port any more. Router Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in
seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global router-time will be used.
member-time
—— Member Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not
receive IGMP report message from the member port, it will consider this port
is not a member port any more. Member Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in
seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global member-time will be used.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
port-channel-id
—— The ID of the port channels.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable Multicast VLAN 3, and configure Router Port Time as 100 seconds,
Member Port Time 100 seconds, and Static Router Port port 1/0/3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config 3 rtime 100
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config 3 mtime 100
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config 3 rport
interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
33.13 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config
(router-port-forbidden)
Description
This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in
the specified multicast VLAN. To delete the forbidden router ports, please
use no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config router-ports-forbidd
command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config [
vlan-id
] router-port-forbidd
interface { gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
308
no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config router-port-forbidd [ interface
{ gigabitEthernet
port-list
| port-channel
port-channel-id
}
]
Parameter
vlan-id
—— The ID of the multicast VLAN, ranging from 2 to 4094.
port-list
—— Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent
from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded.
port-channel-id
—— Forbid the specified port-channels as being router ports.
Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be discarded.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in multicast VLAN 1 :
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config 1
router-port-forbidd interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3
33.14 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config
(source-ip-replace)
Description
This command is used to replace the multicast source IP address of the MLD
packets in the specified multicast VLAN. To delete the forbidden router ports,
please use no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config replace-sourceip
command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config [
vlan-id
] replace-sourceip
ip
no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config replace-sourceip
Parameter
vlan-id
——The ID of the multicast VLAN, ranging from 2 to 4094..
ip
—— Specify the IP address. The switch will use this IP address to replace
the source IP address of the MLD packets.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
309
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Replace the source IP address of the MLD packets in multicast VLAN 1 as
fe80::02ff:ffff:fe00:0001:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config 1
replace-sourceip fe80::02ff:ffff:fe00:0001
33.15 ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan command is used to enable the MLD
Querier function. To disable this function, please use no ipv6 mld snooping
querier vlan command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan
vlan-id
no ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan
vlan-id
Parameter
vlan-id
—— The VLAN that enables the MLD querier function, ranging from 1
to 4094.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable MLD Querier function on VLAN 2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan 2
33.16 ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan (general
query)
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan command is used to configure the
parameters for MLD Snooping Querier to send a general query frame. To
310
return to the default configuration, please use no ipv6 mld snooping querier
vlan command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan
vlan-id
{ query-interval
interval |
max-response-time
response-time |
general-query source-ip
ip-addr
}
no ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan
vlan-id
{ query-interval
|
max-response-time
|
general-query source-ip }
Parameter
vlan-id
—— VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
interval
—— The time interval to send a general query frame by MLD
Snooping Querier, ranging from 10 to 300 (Seconds). By default, it is 60
seconds.
response-time
—— The maximal time for the host to respond to a general
query frame, ranging from 1 to 25 (Seconds). By default, it is 10 Seconds.
ip-addr
—— The source IP of the general query frame sent by MLD Snooping
Querier. It should not be a multicast IP or a broadcast IP. By default, it is
fe80::02ff:ffff:fe00:0001.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
For VLAN 2, specify its query-interval as 200 seconds, and the response-time
as 20 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan 2 query-interval
200
T2500G-10MPS(config)#ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan 2
max-response-time 20
33.17 ipv6 mld snooping max-groups
Description
The ipv6 mld snooping max-groups command is used to configure the
maximum number of groups that a port can join in. The ipv6 mld snooping
max-groups action is used to configure the action that the port takes when it
311
receives an MLD report message and the maximum number of entries is in
the forwarding table. To remove the maximum group limitation and return to
the default of no limitation on the specified port, please use the no ipv6 mld
snooping max-groups command. To return to the default action of dropping
the report, please use the no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action
command. These commands only apply to the dynamic multicast groups.
Syntax
ipv6 mld snooping max-groups [
maxgroup
]
ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action { drop | replace }
no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups
no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action
Parameter
maxgroup
—— Specify the maximum numbers of groups that the port can
join. It ranges from 0 to 1000 and the default value is 1000.
drop
—— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins
has exceeded the max-group, the port will not join any new multicast group.
replace
—— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port
joins has exceeded the max-group, the newly joined multicast group will
replace an existing multicast group with the lowest multicast group address.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the maximum numbers of groups that ports 1/0/2-5 can join as 10,
and configure the throttling action as replace:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)#ipv6 mld snooping max-groups 10
T2500G-10MPS(config-if-range)#ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action
replace
312
33.18 ipv6 mld profile
Description
The ipv6 mld profile command is used to create the configuration profile. To
delete the corresponding profile, please use no ipv6 mld profile command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld profile
id
no ipv6 mld profile
id
Parameter
id
—— Specify the id of the configuration profile, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Create the profile 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1
33.19 deny
Description
The deny command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as deny.
Syntax
deny
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as deny:
313
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-igmp-profile)#deny
33.20 permit
Description
The permit command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as
permit.
Syntax
permit
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as permit:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-igmp-profile)#permit
33.21 range
Description
The range command is used to configure the range of the profile’s filtering
multicast address. To delete the corresponding filtering multicast address,
please use no range command. A profile contains 16 filtering IP-range entries
at most.
Syntax
range
start-ip
end-ip
no range
start-ip end-ip
Parameter
start-ip
—— Start IPv6 multicast address of the filter entry..
end-ip
—— End IPv6 multicast address of the filter entry.
314
Command Mode
Profile Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure one of the filter multicast address entry as range ff80::1234 to
ff80::1235 in profile 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-igmp-profile)#range ff80::1234 ff80::1235
33.22 ipv6 mld filter
Description
The ipv6 mld filter command is used to bind the specified profile to the
interface. To delete the binding, please use no ipv6 mld filter command.
Syntax
ipv6 mld filter
profile-id
no ipv6 mld filter
Parameter
profile-id
—— Specify the profile ID, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Bind profile 1 to interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ipv6 mld filter 1
33.23 clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics
Description
The clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics command is used to clear the
statistics of the MLD packets.
315
Syntax
clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Clear the statistics of the MLD packets:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics
33.24 show ipv6 mld snooping
Description
The show ipv6 mld snooping command is used to display the global
configuration of MLD Snooping.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of MLD Snooping:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping
33.25 show ipv6 mld snooping interface
Description
The show ipv6 mld snooping interface command is used to display the port
configuration of MLD snooping.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet [
port
|
port-list
] ]
{ basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat }
316
show ipv6 mld snooping interface [ port-channel [
port-channel-id
] ]
{ basic-config | max-groups }
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
port-list
—— The list of Ethernet ports.
basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat —— The related configuration
information selected to display.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the MLD baisic configuration configuration of all ports and port
channels:
T2500G-10MPS# show ipv6 mld snooping interface basic-config
Display the MLD basic configuration of port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS# show ipv6 mld snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
basic-config
Display the MLD packet statistics of ports 1/0/1-4:
T2500G-10MPS# show ipv6 mld snooping interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/1-4 packet-stat
33.26 show ipv6 mld snooping vlan
Description
The show ipv6 mld snooping vlan command is used to display VLAN
information of MLD Snooping.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping vlan [
vlan-id
]
Parameter
vlan-id
—— The VLAN ID selected to display, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
317
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display all of the VLAN information:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping vlan
33.27 show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan
Description
The show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan command is used to display the
Multicast VLAN configuration.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the Multicast VLAN configuration:
T2500G-10MPS# show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan
33.28 show ipv6 mld snooping groups
Description
The show ipv6 mld snooping groups command is used to display multicast
groups.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping groups [ vlan {
vlan-id
}
]
[
ipv6_multicast_addr
|
count | dynamic | dynamic count | static | static count ]
Parameter
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID selected to display the information of all multicast
items.
ipv6_multicast_addr
—— IPv6 address of the multicast group.
count—— The numbers of all multicast groups.
dynamic—— Display dynamic multicast groups.
318
dynamic count—— The numbers of all dynamic multicast groups.
static—— Display static multicast groups.
static count—— The numbers of all static multicast groups.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display all of the multicast groups:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping groups
33.29 show ipv6 mld snooping querier
Description
The show ipv6 mld snooping querier command is used to display the
Querier configuration of VLAN.
Syntax
show ipv6 mld snooping querier [ vlan
vlan-id
]
Parameter
vlan-id
——The VLAN ID selected to display, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display all Querier information:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping querier
33.30 show ipv6 mld profile
Description
The show ipv6 mld profile command is used to display the configuration
information of all the profiles or a specific profile.
319
Syntax
show ipv6 mld profile [
id
]
Parameter
id
—— Specify the ID of the profile, ranging from 1 to 999.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration information of all profiles:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ipv6 mld profile
320
Chapter 34 SNMP Commands
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) functions are used to manage the network
devices for a smooth communication, which can facilitate the network administrators to
monitor the network nodes and implement the proper operation.
34.1 snmp-server
Description
The snmp-server command is used to enable the SNMP function. By default,
it is disabled. To return to the default configuration, please use no
snmp-server command.
Syntax
snmp-server
no snmp-server
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable the SNMP function:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server
34.2 snmp-server view
Description
The snmp-server view command is used to add View. To delete the
corresponding View, please use no snmp-server view command. The OID
(Object Identifier) of the SNMP packets is used to describe the managed
objects of the switch, and the MIB (Management Information Base) is the set
of the OIDs. The SNMP View is created for the SNMP management station to
manage MIB objects.
Syntax
snmp-server view
name
mib-oid
{ include | exclude }
no snmp-server view
name
mib-oid
321
Parameter
name
—— The entry name of View, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. Each
View includes several entries with the same name.
mib-oid
—— MIB Object ID. It is the Object Identifier (OID) for the entry of
View, ranging from 1 to 61 characters.
include | exclude —— View Type, with include and exclude options. They
represent the view entry can/cannot be managed by the SNMP management
station individually.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Add a View named view1, configuring the OID as 1.3.6.1.6.3.20, and this OID
can be managed by the SNMP management station:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server view view1 1.3.6.1.6.3.20 include
34.3 snmp-server group
Description
The snmp-server group command is used to manage and configure the
SNMP group. To delete the corresponding SNMP group, please use no
snmp-server group command. SNMP v3 provides the VACM (View-based
Access Control Model) and USM (User-Based Security Model) mechanisms
for authentication. The users in the SNMP Group can manage the device via
the Read View, Write View and Notify View. And the authentication mode and
the privacy mode guarantee the high security for the communication
between the management station and the managed device.
Syntax
snmp-server group
name
[ smode { v1 | v2c | v3 }] [ slev { noAuthNoPriv |
authNoPriv | authPriv }] [ read
read-view
] [ write
write-view
] [ notify
notify-view
]
no snmp-server group
name
smode { v1 | v2c | v3 } slev { noAuthNoPriv |
authNoPriv | authPriv }
322
Parameter
name
——The SNMP Group name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. The
Group Name, Security Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the
SNMP Group. These three items of the Users in one group should be the
same.
smode —— Security Model, with v1、v2c and v3 options. They represent
SNMP v1, SNMP v2c and SNMP v3.
slev —— The Security Level of SNMP v3 Group. There are three options,
including noAuthNoPriv（no authorization and no encryption）、 authNoPriv
（authorization and no encryption ） and authPriv （authorization and
encryption）. By default, the Security Level is noAuthNoPriv. There is no need
to configure this in SNMP v1 Mode and SNMP v2c Mode.
read-view
—— Select the View to be the Read View. The management access
is restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to the assigned
SNMP View.
write-view
—— Select the View to be the Write View. The management
access is writing only and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP View.
The View defined both as the Read View and the Write View can be read and
modified.
notify-view
—— Select the View to be the Notify View. The management
station can receive notification messages of the assigned SNMP view
generated by the switch's SNMP agent.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Add a group, and configure the name as group 1, the Security Model as SNMP
v3, the security level as authNoPriv, the management access to the assigned
View viewDefault as read-write, besides the notification messages sent by
View viewDefault can be received by Management station:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server group group1 smode v3 slev
authNoPriv read viewDefault write viewDefault notify viewDefault
Delete group 1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# no snmp-server group group1 smode v3 slev
authNoPriv
323
34.4 snmp-server user
Description
The snmp-server user command is used to add User. To delete the
corresponding User, please use no snmp-server user command. The User in
an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the management station software.
The User and its Group have the same security level and access right.
Syntax
snmp-server user
name
{ local | remote }
group-name
[ smode { v1 | v2c | v3 }]
[ slev { noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv }] [ cmode { none | MD5 | SHA }]
[ cpwd
confirm-pwd
] [ emode { none | DES }] [ epwd
encrypt-pwd
]
no snmp-server user
name
Parameter
name
—— User Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
local | remote —— User Type, with local and remote options. Local indicates
that the user is connected to a local SNMP engine, while remote means that
the user is connected to a remote SNMP engine.
group-name
—— The Group Name of the User. The User is classified to the
corresponding Group according to its Group Name, Security Model and
Security Level.
smode —— The Security Model of the User, with v1, v2c and v3 options. By
default, the option is v1. The Security Model of the User must be the same
with that of the Group which the User belongs to.
slev —— The Security Level of SNMP v3 Group. There are three options,
including noAuthNoPriv (no authorization and no encryption), authNoPriv
(authorization and no encryption) and authPriv (authorization and encryption).
By default, the option is “noAuthNoPriv”. The Security Level of the User must
be the same with that of the Group which the User belongs to.
cmode —— The Authentication Mode of the SNMP v3 User, with none, MD5
and SHA options. None indicates no authentication method is used, MD5
indicates the port authentication is performed via HMAC-MD5 algorithm and
SHA indicates the port authentication is performed via SHA (Secure Hash
Algorithm). SHA authentication mode has a higher security than MD5 mode.
By default, the Authentication Mode is “none”.
confirm-pwd
—— Authentication Password, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
The question marks and spaces are not allowed. This password in the
configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form.
324
emode —— The Privacy Mode of the SNMP v3 User, with none and DES
options. None indicates no privacy method is used, and DES indicates DES
encryption method is used. By default, the Privacy Mode is “none”.
encrypt-pwd
—— Privacy Password, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. The
question marks and spaces are not allowed. This password in the
configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Add Local User admin to Group group2, and configure the Security Model of
the user as v3, the Security Level of the group as authPriv, the Authentication
Mode of the user as MD5, the Authentication Password as 11111, the Privacy
Mode as DES, and the Privacy Password as 22222:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server user admin local group2 smode v3
slev authPriv cmode MD5 cpwd 11111 emode DES epwd 22222
34.5 snmp-server community
Description
The snmp-server community command is used to add Community. To
delete the corresponding Community, please use no snmp-server
community command. SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c adopt community name
authentication. The community name can limit access to the SNMP agent
from SNMP network management station, functioning as a password.
Syntax
snmp-server community
name
{ read-only | read-write }
mib-view
no snmp-server community
name
Parameter
name
—— Community Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
read-only | read-write —— The access rights of the community, with
read-only and read-write options.
mib-view
—— The MIB View for the community to access.
325
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Add community public, and the community has read-write management right
to View viewDefault:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server community public read-write
viewDefault
34.6 snmp-server host
Description
The snmp-server host command is used to add Notification. To delete the
corresponding Notification, please use no snmp-server host command.
Syntax
snmp-server host
ip
udp-port user-name
[ smode { v1 | v2c | v3 }] [ slev
{ noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv }] [ type { trap | inform }] [ retries
retries
]
[ timeout
timeout
]
no snmp-server host
ip user-name
Parameter
ip
—— The IP Address of the management Host. Both IPv4 and IPv6
addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234.
udp-port
—— UDP port, which is used to send notifications. The UDP port
functions with the IP address for the notification sending. It ranges from 1 to
65535.
user-name
—— The User name of the management station.
smode —— The Security Model of the management station, with v1, v2c and
v3 options. By default, the option is v1.
slev —— The Security Level of SNMP v3 Group. There are three options,
including noAuthNoPriv (no authorization and no encryption), authNoPriv
(authorization and no encryption) and authPriv (authorization and encryption).
By default, the option is “noAuthNoPriv”.
type —— The type of the notifications, with trap and inform options. Trap
indicates traps are sent, while inform indicates informs are sent. The inform
326
type has a higher security than the trap type and resend and timeout need to
be configured if you select this option. You can only select the trap type in
Security Model v1. By default, the type of the notifications is “trap”.
retries
—— The amount of times the switch retries an inform request, ranging
from 1 to 255. The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn’t get the
response from the management station during the Timeout interval, and it will
terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the
specified Retry times.
timeout
—— The maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from
the management station before resending a request, ranging from 1 to 3600
in seconds.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Add a Notification entry, and configure the IP address of the management
Host as 192.168.0.146, the UDP port as 162, the User name of the
management station as admin, the Security Model of the management station
as v2c, the type of the notifications as inform, the maximum time for the
switch to wait as 1000 seconds, and the retries time as 100:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.0.146 162 admin
smode v2c type inform retries 100 timeout 1000
Add a Notification entry, and configure the IP Address of the management
Host as fe80::1234, the UDP port as 162, the User name of the management
station as admin, the Security Model of the management station as v2c, the
type of the notifications as inform, the maximum time for the switch to wait as
1000 seconds, and the retries time as 100:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server host fe80::1234 162 admin smode
v2c type inform retries 100 timeout 1000
327
34.7 snmp-server engineID
Description
The snmp-server engineID command is used to configure the local and
remote engineID of the switch. To restore to the default setting, please use
no snmp-server engineID command.
Syntax
snmp-server engineID { [ local
local-engineID
] [ remote
remote-engineID
] }
no snmp-server engineID
Parameter
local-engineID
—— Local Engine ID for local clients. The Engine ID is a unique
alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the switch. Its
length ranges from 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters, which must be even
number meanwhile.
remote-engineID
—— Remote Engine ID for the switch. The Engine ID is a
unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the remote
device which receives informs from the switch. Its length ranges from 10 to
64 hexadecimal characters, which must be even number meanwhile. The
snmp-server engineID will be disabled if the local and remote are both not
configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify the local engineID as 1234567890, and the remote engineID as
abcdef123456:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server engineID local 1234567890 remote
abcdef123456
34.8 snmp-server traps snmp
Description
The snmp-server traps snmp command is used to enable SNMP standard
traps which include four types: linkup, linkdown, warmstart and coldstart. To
328
disable the sending of SNMP standard traps, please use no snmp-server
traps snmp command.
Syntax
snmp-server traps snmp [ linkup | linkdown | warmstart | coldstart |
auth-failure ]
no snmp-server traps snmp [ linkup | linkdown | warmstart | coldstart |
auth-failure ]
Parameter
linkup —— Enable linkup trap. It is sent when port status changes from
linkdown to linkup. By default, it is enabled.
linkdown ——Enable linkdown trap. It is sent when port status changes from
linkup to linkdown. By default, it is enabled.
warmstart —— Enable warmstart trap. It is sent upon SNMP function reboot.
By default, it is enabled.
coldstart —— Enable coldstart trap. It is sent upon switch reboot. By default,
it is enabled.
auth-failure —— Enable the auth-failure trap. It is sent when a received SNMP
request fails the authentication. By default, it is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable SNMP standard linkup trap for the switch:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server traps snmp linkup
34.9 snmp-server traps link-status
Description
The snmp-server traps link-status command is used to enable SNMP link
status trap for the specified port. To disable the sending of SNMP link status
trap, please use no snmp-server traps link-status command.
Syntax
snmp-server traps link-status
no snmp-server traps link-status
329
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable SNMP link status trap for port 3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# snmp-server traps link-status
34.10 snmp-server traps
Description
The snmp-server traps command is used to enable SNMP extended traps.
To disable the sending of SNMP extended traps, please use no snmp-server
traps command.
Syntax
snmp-server traps { bandwidth-control | cpu | flash | lldp remtableschange |
lldp topologychange | loopback-detection | storm-control | spanning-tree |
memory }
no snmp-server traps { bandwidth-control | cpu | flash | lldp
remtableschange | lldp topologychange | loopback-detection | storm-control
| spanning-tree | memory }
Parameter
bandwidth-control —— Enable bandwidth-control trap. It is sent when the
rate limit function is enabled and the bandwidth exceeds the predefined
value.
cpu —— Allow CPU-related trap. It is sent when CPU usage exceeds the
predefined threshold. By default, the CPU usage threshold of the switch is
80%.
flash —— Enable flash trap. It is sent when flash is modified during operations
such as backup, reset, firmware upgrade, configuration import, etc.
lldp remtableschange ——A lldp RemTablesChange notification is sent when
the value of lldp StatsRemTableLastChangeTime changes. It can be utilized
by an NMS to trigger LLDP remote systems table maintenance polls.
330
lldp topologychange —— A notification generated by the local device to
sense the change in the topology that indicates a new remote device
attached to a local port, or a remote device disconnected or moved from one
port to another.
loopback-detection —— Enable loopback-detection trap. It is sent when the
switch detects loopback or loopback is cleared.
storm-control —— Enable storm-control trap. It is sent when the multicast or
broadcast rate exceeds the predefined value.
spanning-tree —— Enable spanning-tree trap. It is sent when the port
forwarding status changes or the port receives TCN packet or packet with TC
fport-channel-.
memory —— Enable memory trap. It is sent when memory usage exceeds
80%.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable SNMP extended bandwidth-control trap for the switch:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server traps bandwidth-control
34.11 snmp-server traps power
Description
The snmp-server traps power command is used to enable SNMP PoE traps.
To disable the sending of SNMP PoE traps, please use no snmp-server traps
power command.
Syntax
snmp-server traps power [ over-max-pwr-budget | port-pwr-change |
port-pwr-deny | port-pwr-over-30w | port-pwr-overload | port-short-circuit |
thermal-shutdown ]
no snmp-server traps power [ over-max-pwr-budget | port-pwr-change |
port-pwr-deny | port-pwr-over-30w | port-pwr-overload | port-short-circuit |
thermal-shutdown ]
331
Parameter
over-max-pwr-budget —— Enable PoE over max power budget trap. The trap
can be triggered when the total power required by all the connected PDs
exceeds the maximum power the PoE switch can supply.
port-pwr-change —— Enable PoE port power change trap . The trap can be
triggered when a PoE port starts to supply power or stops supplying power.
port-pwr-deny —— Enable PoE port power deny trap . When the total power
required by all the connected PDs exceeds the system power limit, the switch
will power off PDs on low-priority PoE ports to ensure stable running of the
other PDs. The trap can be triggered when the switch powers off PDs on
low-priority PoE ports.
port-pwr-over-30w —— Enable PoE port power over 30 watts trap. The trap
can be triggered when the power required by the connected PD exceeds 30
watts.
port-pwr-overload —— Enable PoE port power overload trap. The trap can be
triggered when the power required by the connected PD exceeds the
maximum power that the port can supply.
port-short-circuit —— Enable PoE port short circuit trap. The trap can be
triggered when a short circuit is detected on a PoE port.
thermal-shutdown ——Enable PoE port short circuit trap. The trap can be
triggered when a short circuit is detected on a PoE port.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable SNMP PoE over max power budget traps for the switch:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server traps power over-max-pwr-budget
34.12 snmp-server traps ddm
Description
The snmp-server traps ddm command is used to enable SNMP DDM traps.
DDM function is used to monitor the status of the SFP modules inserted into
the SFP ports on the switch.
332
To disable the sending of SNMP DDM traps, use no snmp-server traps ddm
command.
Syntax
snmp-server traps ddm [ temperature | voltage | bias_current | tx_power |
rx_power ]
no snmp-server traps ddm [ temperature | voltage | bias_current | tx_power |
rx_power ]
Parameter
temperature —— Enable DDM Temperature trap. It is sent when the DDM
temperature value exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold.
voltage —— Enable DDM Voltage trap. It is sent when the DDM voltage value
exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold.
bias_current —— Enable DDM Bias Current trap. It is sent when the DDM bias
current value exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold.
tx_power —— Enable DDM Tx Power trap. It is sent when the DDM Tx power
value exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold.
rx_power —— Enable DDM Rx Power trap. It is sent when the DDM Rx power
value exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold.
User guidelines
The snmp-server traps ddm command without any parameter is used to
enable all the types of DDM traps. And the no snmp-server traps ddm
command without any parameter is used to disable all the types of DDM
traps.
For more instructions about the alarm threshold or warning threshold, refer to
Chapter 28 DDM Commands.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Example
Enable all the SNMP DDM traps for the switch:
T2500-28TC(config)# snmp-server traps ddm
333
34.13 snmp-server traps vlan
Description
The snmp-server traps vlan command is used to enable SNMP extended
VLAN-related traps which include two types: create and delete. To disable
this function, please use no snmp-server traps vlan command.
Syntax
snmp-server traps vlan [ create | delete ]
no snmp-server traps vlan [create | delete ]
Parameter
create —— Enable VLAN-created trap. It is sent when new VLAN is created
successfully.
delete —— Enable VLAN-deleted traps. It is sent when VLAN is deleted
successfully.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enable all SNMP extended VLAN-related traps for the switch：
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server traps vlan
Enable VLAN-created trap only for the switch:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# snmp-server traps vlan create
34.14 rmon history
Description
The rmon history command is used to configure the history sample entry. To
return to the default configuration, please use no rmon history command.
RMON (Remote Monitoring), basing on SNMP architecture, functions to
monitor the network. History Group is one of the commonly used RMON
Groups. After a history group is configured, the switch collects network
statistics information periodically, based on which the management station
can monitor network effectively.
334
Syntax
rmon history
index
interface gigabitEthernet
port
[ interval
seconds
]
[ owner
owner-name
] [ buckets
number
]
no rmon history
index
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the entry, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format
of 1-3,5.
port
——The Ethernet port number.
seconds
—— The interval to take samplings from the port, ranging from 10 to
3600 in seconds. By default, it is 1800.
owner-name
—— The owner of the history sample entry, ranging from 1 to 16
characters. By default, it is “monitor”.
number
—— The maximum number of buckets desired for the RMON history
group of statistics, ranging from 1 to 130. The default is 50 buckets.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the sample port as Gi1/0/2 and the sample interval as 100 seconds
for the entry 1-3:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# rmon history 1-3 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
interval 100 owner owner1
34.15 rmon event
Description
The rmon event command is used to configure the entries of SNMP-RMON
Event. To return to the default configuration, please use no rmon event
command. Event Group, as one of the commonly used RMON Groups, is used
to define RMON events. Alarms occur when an event is detected.
Syntax
rmon event
index
[ user
user-name
] [ description
descript
] [ type { none |
log | notify | log-notify }] [ owner
owner-name
]
no rmon event
index
335
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 12. You can
only select one entry for each command.
user-name
—— The name of the User to which the event belongs, ranging
from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is “public”.
descript
—— The description of the event, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
By default, it is empty.
type —— The event type, with none, log, notify and both options. None
indicates no processing, log indicates logging the event, notify indicates
sending trap messages to the management station, and both indicates
logging the event and sending trap messages to the management station.
owner-name
—— The owner of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 16
characters. By default, it is “monitor”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the user name of entry 1, 2, 3 and 4 as user1, the description of the
event as description1, the type of event as log and the owner of the event as
owner1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# rmon event 1-4 user user1 description
description1 type log owner owner1
34.16 rmon alarm
Description
The rmon alarm command is used to configure SNMP-RMON Alarm
Management. To return to the default configuration, please use no rmon
alarm command. Alarm Group is one of the commonly used RMON Groups.
RMON alarm management allows monitoring the specific alarm variables.
When the value of a monitored variable exceeds the threshold, an alarm event
is generated, which triggers the switch to act in the set way.
336
Syntax
rmon alarm
index
{ stats-index
sindex
} [ alarm-variable { revbyte | revpkt |
bpkt | mpkt | crc-lign | undersize | oversize | jabber | collision | 64 | 65-127 |
128-511 | 512-1023 | 1024-10240 }] [ s-type { absolute | delta} ]
[ rising-threshold
r-hold
] [ rising-event-index
r-event
] [ falling-threshold
f-hold
] [ falling-event-index
f-event
] [ a-type {rise | fall | all} ] [ owner
owner-name
] [ interval
interval
]
no rmon alarm
index
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the Alarm Management entry, ranging from 1
to 12, in the format of 1-3,5.
sindex
—— Specify the statistics index.
alarm-variable —— The alarm variable. By default, the option is revbyte.
s-type
—— Sample Type, which is the sampling method for the selected
variable and comparing the value against the thresholds. There are two
options, absolute and delta. Absolute indicates comparing the values directly
with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. Delta indicates
subtracting the last sampled value from the current value, and then
comparing the difference in the values with the threshold. By default, the
Sample Type is absolute.
r-hold
—— The rising counter value that triggers the Rising Threshold alarm,
ranging from 1 to 2147483647. By default, it is 100.
r-event
—— Rise Event, which is the index of the corresponding event which
will be triggered if the sampled value is larger than the Rising Threshold. It
ranges from 1 to 12.
f-hold
—— The falling counter value that triggers the Falling Threshold alarm,
ranging from 1 to 2147483647. By default, it is 100.
f-event
—— Fall Event, which is the index of the corresponding event which
will be triggered if the sampled value is lower than the Falling Threshold. It
ranges from 1 to 12.
a-type —— Alarm Type, with rise, fall and all options. Rise indicates that the
alarm event will be triggered when the sampled value exceeds the Rising
Threshold, fall indicates that the alarm event will be triggered when the
sampled value is under the Falling Threshold, and all indicates that the alarm
event will be triggered either the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold
or is under the Falling Threshold. By default, the Alarm Type is all.
337
owner-name
—— The owner of the entry, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By
default, it is monitor.
interval
—— The alarm interval time, ranging from 10 to 3600 in seconds. By
default, it is 1800.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure rmon alarm entries 1-3 binding with statistics entry 2, the owners
as owner1 and the alarm intervals as 100 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#rmon alarm 1-3 stats-index 2 owner owner1
interval 100
34.17 rmon statistics
Description
The rmon statistics command is used to configure the entries of
SNMP-RMON statistics. To delete the corresponding entry, please use no
rmon statistics command. The maximum supported entries are 1000.
Syntax
rmon statistics
index
interface gigabitEthernet
port
[ owner
owner-name
]
[ status { underCreation | valid }]
no rmon statistics
index
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the statistics entry, ranging from 1 to 65535,
in the format of 1-3,5.
port
—— The statistics port number, in the format of 1/0/1.
owner-name
—— The creator of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 16
characters. By default, it is “monitor”.
status —— The status of the statistics entry, either “underCreation” or
“valid”. “underCreation” means this entry won’t take effect until it is modified
to “valid”; “valid” means this entry takes effect immediately after it is created.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
338
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the statistics entries 1-3 with the statistics port as 1/0/1, owner as
owner1 and status as valid:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#rmon statistics 1-3 interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/1 owner owner1 status valid
34.18 show snmp-server
Description
The show snmp-server command is used to display SNMP configuration
globally.
Syntax
show snmp-server
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display SNMP configuration globally:
T2500G-10MPS# show snmp-server
34.19 show snmp-server view
Description
The show snmp-server view command is used to display the View table.
Syntax
show snmp-server view
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
339
Example
Display the View table:
T2500G-10MPS# show snmp-server view
34.20 show snmp-server group
Description
The show snmp-server group command is used to display the Group table.
Syntax
show snmp-server group
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the Group table:
T2500G-10MPS# show snmp-server group
34.21 show snmp-server user
Description
The show snmp-server user command is used to display the User table.
Syntax
show snmp-server user
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the User table:
T2500G-10MPS# show snmp-server user
340
34.22 show snmp-server community
Description
The show snmp-server community command is used to display the
Community table.
Syntax
show snmp-server community
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the Community table:
T2500G-10MPS# show snmp-server community
34.23 show snmp-server host
Description
The show snmp-server host command is used to display the Host table.
Syntax
show snmp-server host
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the Host table:
T2500G-10MPS# show snmp-server host
34.24 show snmp-server engineID
Description
The show snmp-server engineID command is used to display the engineID
of the SNMP.
341
Syntax
show snmp-server engineID
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the engineID:
T2500G-10MPS# show snmp-server engineID
34.25 show rmon history
Description
The show rmon history command is used to display the configuration of the
history sample entry.
Syntax
show rmon history [
index
]
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the entry selected to display the
configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select
more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all
history sample entries is displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the configuration of all history sample entries:
T2500G-10MPS# show rmon history
342
34.26 show rmon event
Description
The show rmon event command is used to display the configuration of
SNMP-RMON Event.
Syntax
show rmon event [
index
]
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the entry selected to display the
configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select
more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all
SNMP-RMON enabled entries is displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the Event configuration of entry1-4:
T2500G-10MPS# show rmon event 1-4
34.27 show rmon alarm
Description
The show rmon alarm command is used to display the configuration of the
Alarm Management entry.
Syntax
show rmon alarm [
index
]
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the entry selected to display the
configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select
more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all
Alarm Management entries is displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
343
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the configuration of the Alarm Management entry 1-2:
T2500G-10MPS# show rmon alarm 1-2
34.28 show rmon statistics
Description
The show rmon statistics command is used to display the configuration of
the specified statistics entry.
Syntax
show rmon statistics [
index
]
Parameter
index
—— The index number of the statistics entry selected to display the
configuration, ranging from 1 to 65535. By default, the configuration of all
statistics entries is displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the configuration of the statistics entry 1:
T2500G-10MPS#show rmon statistics 1
344
Chapter 35 LLDP Commands
LLDP function enables network devices to advertise their own device information periodically
to neighbors on the same LAN. The information of the LLDP devices in the LAN can be stored
by its neighbor in a standard MIB, so it is possible for the information to be accessed by a
Network Management System (NMS) using SNMP.
35.1 lldp
Description
The lldp command is used to enable LLDP function. To disable the LLDP
function, please use no lldp command.
Syntax
lldp
no lldp
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable LLDP function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#lldp
35.2 lldp hold-multiplier
Description
The lldp hold-multiplier command is used to configure the Hold Multiplier
parameter. The aging time of the local information in the neighbor device is
determined by the actual TTL value used in the sending LLDPDU. TTL = Hold
Multiplier * Transmit Interval. To return to the default configuration, please
use no lldp hold-multiplier command.
Syntax
lldp hold-multiplier
multiplier
no lldp hold-multiplier
345
Parameter
multiplier
—— Configure the Hold Multiplier parameter. It ranges from 2 to 10.
By default, it is 4.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify Hold Multiplier as 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#lldp hold-multiplier 5
35.3 lldp timer
Description
The lldp timer command is used to configure the parameters about
transmission. To return to the default configuration, please use no lldp timer
command.
Syntax
lldp timer { tx-interval
tx-interval |
tx-delay
tx-delay |
reinit-delay
reinit-delay
|
notify-interval
notify-interval |
fast-count
fast-count
}
no lldp timer { tx-interval | tx-delay | reinit-delay | notify-interval | fast-count }
Parameter
tx-interval
—— Configure the interval for the local device to transmit LLDPDU
to its neighbors. The value ranges from 5 to 32768 and the default value is 30
seconds.
tx-delay
—— Configure a value from 1 to 8192 in seconds to specify the time
for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors after changes occur
so as to prevent LLDPDU being sent frequently. By default, it is 2 seconds.
reinit-delay
—— This parameter indicates the amount of delay from when
LLDP status becomes "disable" until re-initialization will be attempted. The
value ranges from 1 to 10 and the default value is 3.
notify-interval
—— Specify the interval of Trap message which will be sent
from local device to network management system. The value ranges from 5
to 3600 and the default value is 5 seconds.
346
fast-count
—— When the port's LLDP state transforms from Disable (or
Rx_Only) to Tx&Rx (or Tx_Only), the fast start mechanism will be enabled, that
is, the transmit interval will be shorten to a second, and several LLDPDUs will
be sent out (the number of LLDPDUs equals this parameter). The value ranges
from 1 to 10 and the default value is 3.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the Transmit Interval of LLDPDU as 45 seconds and Trap message to
NMS as 120 seconds:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#lldp timer tx-interval 45
T2500G-10MPS(config)#lldp timer notify-interval 120
35.4 lldp receive
Description
The lldp receive command is used to enable the designated port to receive
LLDPDU. To disable the function, please use no lldp receive command.
Syntax
lldp receive
no lldp receive
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1 to receive LLDPDU:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#lldp receive
347
35.5 lldp transmit
Description
The lldp transmit command is used to enable the designated port to transmit
LLDPDU. To disable the function, please use no lldp transmit command.
Syntax
lldp transmit
no lldp transmit
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1 to transmit LLDPDU:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#lldp transmit
35.6 lldp snmp-trap
Description
The lldp snmp-trap command is used to enable the port’s SNMP notification.
If enabled, the port will notify the trap event to network management system.
To disable the ports' SNMP notification, please use no lldp snmp-trap
command.
Syntax
lldp snmp-trap
no lldp snmp-trap
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
348
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the SNMP notification for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)#lldp snmp-trap
35.7 lldp tlv-select
Description
The lldp tlv-select command is used to configure TLVs to be included in
outgoing LLDPDU. To exclude TLVs, please use no lldp tlv-select command.
By default, All TLVs are included in outgoing LLDPDU.
Syntax
lldp tlv-select { [ port-description ] [ system-capability ] [ system-description ]
[ system-name ] [ management-address ] [ port-vlan ] [ protocol-vlan ]
[ vlan-name ] [ link-aggregation ] [ mac-phy-cfg ] [ max-frame-size ] [ power ]
[ all ] }
no lldp tlv-select { [ port-description ] [ system-capability ]
[ system-description ] [ system-name ] [ management-address ] [ port-vlan ]
[ protocol-vlan ] [ vlan-name ] [ link-aggregation ] [ mac-phy-cfg ]
[ max-frame-size ] [ power ] [ all ] }
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Exclude “management-address” and “port-vlan-id” TLVs in LLDPDU outgoing
from Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# no lldp tlv-select management-address
port-vlan
349
35.8 lldp med-fast-count
Description
The lldp med-fast-count command is used to configure the number of the
LLDP-MED frames that will be sent out. When LLDP-MED fast start
mechanism is activated, multiple LLDP-MED frames will be transmitted based
on this parameter. The default value is 4. To return to the default
configuration, please use no lldp med-fast-count command.
Syntax
lldp med-fast-count
count
no lldp med-fast-count
Parameter
count
—— Configure the Fast Start Count parameter. It ranges from 1 to 10.
By default, it is 4.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.
Example
Specify Fast Start Count as 5:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# lldp med-fast-count 5
35.9 lldp med-status
Description
The lldp med-status command is used to enable the LLDP-MED feature for
the corresponding port. After the LLDP-MED feature is enabled, the port's
Admin Status will be changed to Tx&Rx. To disable the LLDP-MED feature for
the corresponding port, please use no lldp med-status command.
Syntax
lldp med-status
no lldp med-status
350
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the LLDP-MED feature for port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# lldp med-status
35.10 lldp med-tlv-select
Description
The lldp med-tlv-select command is used to configure LLDP-MED TLVs to
be included in outgoing LLDPDU for the corresponding port. To exclude
LLDP-MED TLVs, please use no lldp med-tlv-select command. By default, All
TLVs are included in outgoing LLDPDU.
Syntax
lldp med-tlv-select { [inventory-management]
[location]
[network-policy]
[power-management] [all]
}
no lldp med-tlv-select { [inventory-management]
[location]
[network-policy]
[power-management] [all]
}
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Exclude “network policy” and “inventory” TLVs in LLDPDU outgoing from port
1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
351
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# no lldp med-tlv-select network-policy
inventory- management
35.11 lldp med-location
Description
The lldp med-location command is used to configure the Location
Identification TLV's content in outgoing LLDPDU of the port.
Syntax
lldp med-location { emergency-number
identifier
| civic-address
[ [ language
language
] [ province-state
province-state
] [ county
county
] [city
city
] [ street
street
] [ house-number
house-number
] [name
name
]
[ postal-zipcode
postal-zipcode
] [ room-number
room-number
]
[ post-office-box
post-office-box
] [ additional
additional
] [ country-code
country-code
] [ what { dhcp-server | endpoint | switch } ] ] }
Parameter
emergency-number —— Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier, which is
used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based
PSAP. The length of this field ranges from 10 to 25 characters.
civic-address —— The civic address is defined to reuse the relevant
sub-fields of the DHCP option for civic Address based Location Configuration
Information as specified by IETF.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the civic address in the Location Identification TLV's content in
outgoing LLDPDU of port 1/0/2. Configure the language as English and city as
London:
T2700-28TQ (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2700-28TQ(config-if)# lldp med-location civic-address language English
city London
352
35.12 show lldp
Description
The show lldp command is used to display the global configuration of LLDP.
Syntax
show lldp
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the global configuration of LLDP:
T2500G-10MPS#show lldp
35.13 show lldp interface
Description
The show lldp interface command is used to display LLDP configuration of
the corresponding port. By default, the LLDP configuration of all the ports will
be displayed.
Syntax
show lldp interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the LLDP configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS#show lldp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
353
35.14 show lldp local-information interface
Description
The show lldp local-information interface command is used to display the
LLDP information of the corresponding port. By default, the LLDP information
of all the ports will be displayed.
Syntax
show lldp local-information interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the LLDP information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS#show lldp local-information interface gigabitEthernet
1/0/1
35.15 show lldp neighbor-information interface
Description
The show lldp neighbor-information interface command is used to display
the neighbor information of the corresponding port. By default, the neighbor
information of all the ports will be displayed.
Syntax
show lldp neighbor-information interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
354
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the neighbor information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS#show lldp neighbor-information interface
gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
35.16 show lldp traffic interface
Description
The show lldp traffic interface command is used to display the LLDP
statistic information between the local device and neighbor device of the
corresponding port. By default, the LLDP statistic information of all the ports
will be displayed.
Syntax
show lldp traffic interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameters
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the LLDP statistic information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:
T2500G-10MPS#show lldp traffic interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1
355
Chapter 36 AAA Commands
AAA stands for authentication, authorization and accounting. This feature is used to
authenticate users trying to log in to the switch or trying to access the administrative level
privilege.
Applicable Access Application
The authentication can be applied on the following access applications: Console, Telnet, SSH
and HTTP.
Authentication Method List
A method list describes the authentication methods and their sequence to authenticate a user.
The switch supports Login List for users to gain access to the switch, and Enable List for
normal users to gain administrative privileges.
RADIUS/TACACS+ Server
User can configure the RADIUS/TACACS+ servers for the connection between the switch and
the server.
Server Group
User can define the authentication server group with up to several servers running the same
secure protocols, either RADIUS or TACACS+. Users can set these servers in a preferable
order, which is called the server group list. When a user tries to access the switch, the switch
will ask the first server in the server group list for authentication. If no response is received, the
second server will be queried, and so on.
36.1 aaa enable
Description
The aaa enable command is used to enable the AAA function globally. To
disable the AAA function globally, please use the no aaa enable command.
The global AAA function is disabled by default.
Syntax
aaa enable
no aaa enable
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
356
Example
Enable the AAA function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# aaa enable
36.2 tacacas-server host
Description
The tacacs-server host command is used to configure a new TACACS+
server. To delete the specified TACACS+ server, please use no
tacacs-server host command.
Syntax
tacacs-server host
ip-address
[ port
port-id
]
[ timeout
time
] [ key { [ 0 ]
string
| 7
encryped-string
} ]
no tacacs-server host
ip-address
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the IP address of the TACACS+ server.
port-id
—— Specify the server’s port number for AAA. By default it is 49.
time
—— Specify the time in seconds the switch waits for the server’s
response before it times out. The time ranges from 1 to 9 seconds. The
default is 5 seconds.
[ 0 ]
string
| 7
encrypted-string
—— 0 and 7 are the encryption type. 0
indicates that an unencrypted key will follow. 7 indicates that a symmetric
encrypted key with a fixed length will follow. By default, the encryption type is
0. “
string
”
is
the shared key for the switch and the authentication servers to
exchange messages which contains 31 characters at most. The question
marks and spaces are not allowed. “
encrypted-string
” is a symmetric
encrypted key with a fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s
configuration file. The key or encrypted-key you configured here will be
displayed in the encrypted form. Always configure the key as the last item of
this command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
357
User Guidelines
The TACACS+ servers you configured are added in the server group “tacacs”
by default.
Example
Configure a TACACS+ server with the IP address as 1.1.1.1, TCP port as 1500,
timeout as 6 seconds, and the unencrypted key string as 12345.
T2500G-10MPS(config)# tacacs-server host 1.1.1.1 port 1500 timeout 6
key 12345
36.3 show tacacs-server
Description
This show tacacs-server command is used to display the summary
information of the TACACS+ servers.
Syntax
show tacacs-server
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of all the TACACS+ servers:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show tacacs-server
36.4 radius-server host
Description
The radius-server host command is used to configure a new RADIUS server.
To delete the specified RADIUS server, please use no radius-server host
command.
358
Syntax
radius-server host
ip-address
[ auth-port
port-id
] [ acct-port
port-id
]
[ timeout
time
] [ retransmit
number
] [ key { [ 0 ]
string
| 7
encrypted-string
} ]
no radius-server host
ip-address
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the IP address of the RADIUS server.
auth-port
port-id
—— Specify the UDP destination port for authentication
requests. By default it is 1812.
acct-port
port-id
—— Specify the UDP destination port for accouting
requests. By deault it is 1813.
time
—— Specify the time in seconds the switch waits for the server’s
response before it times out. The time ranges from 1 to 9 seconds. The
default is 5 seconds.
number
—— Specify the number of times a RADIUS request is resent to a
server if the server is not responding in time. By default it is 2 times.
[ 0 ]
string
| 7
encrypted-string
—— 0 and 7 are the encryption type. 0
indicates that an unencrypted key will follow. 7 indicates that a symmetric
encrypted key with a fixed length will follow. By default, the encryption type is
0. “
string
”
is
the shared key for the switch and the authentication servers to
exchange messages which contains 31 characters at most. The question
marks and spaces are not allowed. “
encrypted-string
” is a symmetric
encrypted key with a fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s
configuration file. The key or encrypted-key you configured here will be
displayed in the encrypted form. Always configure the key as the last item of
this command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
The RADIUS servers you configured are added in the server group “radius” by
default.
359
Example
Configure a RADIUS server with the IP address as 1.1.1.1, authentication port
as 1200, timeout as 6 seconds, retransmit times as 3, and the unencrypted
key string as 12345.
T2500G-10MPS(config)# radius-server host 1.1.1.1 auth-port 1200
timeout 6 retransmit 3 key 12345
36.5 show radius-server
Description
This show radius-server command is used to display the summary
information of the RADIUS servers.
Syntax
show radius-server
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of all the RADIUS servers:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show radius-server
36.6 aaa group
Description
This aaa group command is used to create AAA server groups to group
existing TACACS+/RADIUS servers for authentication. This command puts
the switch in the server group subconfiguration mode.
To delete the corresponding AAA group, please use the no aaa group
command.
360
Syntax
aaa group { radius | tacacs }
group-name
no aaa group { radius | tacacs }
group-name
Parameter
radius | tacacs —— Specify the server group type as RADIUS or TACACS+.
group-name
—— Specify the server group name.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Create a RADIUS server group with the name radius1:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# aaa group radius radius1
36.7 server
Description
This server command is used to add the existing server in the defined server
group. To remove the specified server from the server group, please use the
no server command.
Syntax
server
ip-address
no server
ip-address
Parameter
ip-address
—— Specify the server’s IP address.
Command Mode
Server Group Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Create the RADIUS server 1.1.1.1 to RADIUS server group “radius1”:
361
T2500G-10MPS(config)# aaa group radius radius1
T2500G-10MPS(aaa-group)# server 1.1.1.1
36.8 show aaa group
Description
This show aaa group command is used to display the summary information
of the AAA groups. All the servers in this group will be listed if you specify the
group name.
Syntax
show aaa group [
group-name
]
Parameter
group-name
—— Specify the server group name.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of all the server groups:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show aaa group
36.9 aaa authentication login
Description
This aaa authentication login command is used to configure a login
authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication
methods and their sequence to authenticate a user. To delete the specified
authentication method list, please use the no aaa authentication login
command.
Syntax
aaa authentication login {
method-list
} {
method1
} [
method2
] [
method3
]
[
method4
]
no authentication login
method-list
362
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the method list name.
method1, method2, method3, method4
—— Specify the authentication
methods in order. The next authentication method is tried only if the previous
method does not respond, not if it fails.
The preset methods include radius, tacacs, local and none. “radius” means
the RADIUS server group “radius”; “tacacs” means the RACACS+ server
group “tacacs”; “local” means local username database are used; “none”
means no authentication is used for login.
Users can aslo define new method with the aaa group command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
By default the login authentication method list is “default” with “local” as
method1.
Example
Configure a login authentication method list “list1” with the priority1 method
as radius and priority2 method as local:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# aaa authenticaiton login list1 radius local
36.10 aaa authentication enable
Description
This aaa authentication enable command is used to configure a privilege
authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication
methods and their sequence to elevate a user’s privilege. To delete the
specified authentication method list, please use the no aaa authentication
enable command.
Syntax
aaa authentication enable {
method-list
} {
method1
} [
method2
] [
method3
]
[
method4
]
no authentication enable
method-list
363
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the method list name.
method1, method2, method3, method4
—— Specify the authentication
methods in order. The next authentication method is tried only if the previous
method does not respond, not if it fails.
The preset methods include radius, tacacs, local and none. “radius” means
the RADIUS server group “radius”; “tacacs” means the RACACS+ server
group “tacacs”; “local” means local username database are used; “none”
means no authentication is used for privilege elevation.
Users can aslo define new method with the aaa group command.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
User Guidelines
By default the enable authentication method is “default” with “none” as
method1.
Example
Configure a privilege authentication method list “list2” with the priority1
method as radius and priority2 method as local:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# aaa authenticaiton enable list2 radius local
36.11 aaa authentication dot1x default
Description
This aaa authentication dot1x default command is used to configure an
802.1X authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication
methods for users’ login in 802.1X. To delete the default authentication
method list, please use the no aaa authentication dot1x default command.
Syntax
aaa authentication dot1x default {
method
}
no aaa authentication dot1x default
364
Parameter
method
—— Specify the method name. Only RADIUS server group is
supported, and the default method is server group “radius”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the default 802.1X authentication method as “radius1”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default radius1
36.12 aaa accounting dot1x default
Description
This aaa accounting dot1x default command is used to configure an 802.1X
accounting method list. To delete the default accounting method list, please
use the no aaa accounting dot1x default command.
Syntax
aaa accounting dot1x default {
method
}
no aaa accounting dot1x default
Parameter
method
—— Specify the method name. Only RADIUS server group is
supported, and the default method is server group “radius”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the default 802.1X accounting method as “radius1”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# aaa accounting dot1x default radius1
365
36.13 show aaa authentication
Description
This show aaa authentication command is used to display the summary
information of the authentication login, enable and dot1x metheod list.
Syntax
show aaa authentication [ login | enable | dot1x ]
Parameter
login | enable | dot1x —— Specify the method list type.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the information of all the authentication method lists:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show aaa authentication
36.14 show aaa accounting
Description
This show aaa accounting command is used to display the summary
information of the accounting metheod list.
Syntax
show aaa accounting [ dot1x ]
Parameter
dot1x —— Specify the method list type.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
366
Example
Display the information of the default 802.1X accounting method list:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show aaa accounting
36.15 line console
Description
The line console command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode
configure the console port to which you want to apply the authentication list.
Syntax
line console {
linenum
}
Parameter
linenum
—— The number of users allowed to login through console port. Its
value is 0 in general, for the reason that console input is only active on one
console port at a time.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enter the Console port configuration mode and configure the console port 0:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line console 0
36.16 login authentication(console)
Description
The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication
method list to the console port. To restore to the default authentication
method list, please use the no login authentication command.
Syntax
login authentication {
method-list
}
no login authentication
367
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the login method list on the console port. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “local”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the login authentication method list on the console port as “list1”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# line console 0
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)# login authentication list1
36.17 enable authentication(console)
Description
The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege
authentication method list to the console port. To restore to the default
authentication method list, please use the no enable authentication
command.
Syntax
enable authentication {
method-list
}
no enable authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the enable method list on the console port. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “none”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the enable authentication method list on the console port as “list2”:
368
T2500G-10MPS(config)# line console 0
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)# enable authentication list2
36.18 line telnet
Description
The line telnet command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode to
configure the telnet terminal line to which you want to apply the
authentication list.
Syntax
line telnet
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enter the telnet terminal line configuration mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line telnet
36.19 login authentication(telnet)
Description
The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication
method list to the telnet terminal line. To restore to the default authentication
method list, please use the no login authentication command.
Syntax
login authentication {
method-list
}
no login authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the login method list on the telnet terminal line. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “local”.
369
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the login authentication method list on the telnet terminal line as
“list1”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line telnet
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)# login authentication list1
36.20 line ssh
Description
The line ssh command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode to
configure the ssh terminal line to which you want to apply the authentication
list.
Syntax
line ssh
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Enter the ssh terminal line configuration mode:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line ssh
36.21 login authentication(ssh)
Description
The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication
method list to the ssh terminal line. To restore to the default authentication
method list, please use the no login authentication command.
370
Syntax
login authentication {
method-list
}
no login authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the login method list on the ssh terminal line. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “local”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the login authentication method list on the ssh terminal line as
“list1”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# line ssh
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)# login authentication list1
36.22 enable authentication(telnet)
Description
The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege
authentication method list to the telnet terminal line. To restore to the default
authentication method list, please use the no enable authentication
command.
Syntax
enable authentication {
method-list
}
no enable authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the enable method list on the telnet terminal line. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “none”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
371
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the enable authentication method list on the telnet terminal line as
“list2”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)#line telnet
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)# enable authentication list2
36.23 enable authentication(ssh)
Description
The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege
authentication method list to the ssh terminal line. To restore to the default
authentication method list, please use the no enable authentication
command.
Syntax
enable authentication {
method-list
}
no enable authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the enable method list on the ssh terminal line. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “none”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the enable authentication method list on the ssh terminal line as
“list2”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# line ssh
T2500G-10MPS(config-line)# enable authentication list2
372
36.24 ip http login authentication
Description
The ip http login authentication command is used to apply the login
authentication method list to users accessing through HTTP. To restore to
the default authentication method list, please use the no ip http login
authentication command.
Syntax
ip http login authentication {
method-list
}
no ip http login authentication
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the login method list on the HTTP access. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “local”.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the login authentication method list on the HTTP access as “list1”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http login authentication list1
36.25 ip http enable authentication
Description
The ip http enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege
authentication method list to users accessing through HTTP. To restore to
the default authentication method list, please use the no ip http enable
authentication command.
Syntax
ip http enable authentication {
method-list
}
no ip http enable authentication
373
Parameter
method-list
—— Specify the enable method list on the HTTP access. It is
“default” by default, which contains the method “none”.
Command Mode
Line Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Configure the enable authentication method list on the HTTP access as
“list2”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip http enable authentication list2
36.26 show aaa global
Description
This show aaa global command is used to display global status of AAA
function and the login/enable method lists of different application modules:
console, telnet, ssh and HTTP.
Syntax
show aaa global
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin level users have access to these commands.
Example
Display the AAA function’s global status and each application’s method list:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show aaa global
374
Chapter 37 DHCP Relay Commands
A DHCP Relay is a Layer 3 device that forwards DHCP packets between clients and servers.
DHCP Relay forward requests and replies between clients and servers when they are not on the
same physical subnet.
37.1 service dhcp relay
Description
The service dhcp relay command is used to enable DHCP Relay function
globally. To disable DHCP Relay function, please use no service dhcp relay
command.
Syntax
service dhcp relay
no service dhcp relay
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable DHCP Relay function globally:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# service dhcp relay
37.2 ip dhcp relay information
Description
The ip dhcp relay information command is used to enable option 82 support
in DHCP Relay. To disable this function, please use no ip dhcp relay
information command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information
no ip dhcp relay information
375
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable option 82 support in DHCP Relay:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip dhcp relay information
37.3 ip dhcp relay information policy
Description
The ip dhcp relay information policy command is used to specify the
operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host.
To restore to the default option, please use no ip dhcp relay information
policy command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information policy { drop | keep | replace }
no ip dhcp relay information policy
Parameter
drop | keep | replace ——The operations for Option 82 field of the DHCP
request packets from the Host. The default operation is keep.
drop: Discard the packet with the Option 82 field.
keep: Keep the Option 82 field in the packet.
replace: Replace the option 82 field with the system option defined by the
switch.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the option 82 policy as replace to replace the Option 82 field with the
local parameter on receiving the DHCP request packet:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip dhcp relay information policy replace
376
37.4 ip dhcp relay information custom
Description
The ip dhcp relay information custom command is used to enable the
switch to customize the option 82 field. To disable this function, please use
no ip dhcp relay information custom command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information custom
no ip dhcp relay information custom
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the switch to customize the option 82 field:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip dhcp relay information custom
37.5 ip dhcp relay information circuit-id
Description
The ip dhcp relay information circuit-id command is used to specify the
custom circuit ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the
circuit ID, please use no ip dhcp relay information circuit-id command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information circuit-id
circuitID
no ip dhcp relay information circuit-id
Parameter
circuitID
—— Specify the circuit ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
377
Example
Specify the circuit ID as “TP-Link”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip dhcp relay information circuit-id TP-Link
37.6 ip dhcp relay information remote-id
Description
The ip dhcp relay information remote-id command is used to specify the
custom remote ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the
remote ID, please use no ip dhcp relay information remote-id command.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay information remote-id
remoteID
no ip dhcp relay information remote-id
Parameter
remoteID
—— Specify the remote ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Specify the remote ID as “TP-Link”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip dhcp relay information remote-id TP-Link
37.7 ip dhcp relay default-interface
Description
The ip dhcp relay default-interface command is used to configure default
relay agent interface. When the switch works at DHCP VLAN Relay mode and
there is no IP interface in the VLAN, the switch uses the IP of default relay
agent interface to fill in the relay agent IP address field of DHCP packets. To
delete the default relay agent interface use no ip dhcp relay
default-interface.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay default-interface
378
no ip dhcp relay default-interface
Command mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure interface VLAN 1 as the default relay agent interface：
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface vlan 1
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# ip dhcp relay default-interface
37.8 ip dhcp relay vlan
Description
The ip dhcp relay vlan command is used to add DHCP server address to
specified VLAN. If there is an IP interface in the VLAN and it has configured a
DHCP server address at the interface level, then the configuration at the
interface level has higher priority. In this case, the DHCP server configured on
the VLAN will not be used to forward the DHCP packets. To delete the DHCP
server address use no ip dhcp relay vlan.
Syntax
ip dhcp relay vlan
vid
helper-address
ip-address
no ip dhcp relay vlan
vid
helper-address
[ ip-address ]
Parameter
vid
—— VLAN ID.
ip-address
—— DHCP Server address.
Command mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Add DHCP server address 192.168.2.1 to VLAN 1 ：
379
T2500G-10MPS(config)# ip dhcp relay vlan 1 helper-address 192.168.2.1
37.9 show ip dhcp relay
Description
The show ip dhcp relay command is used to display the global status and
Option 82 configuration of DHCP Relay.
Syntax
show ip dhcp relay
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of DHCP Relay:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# show ip dhcp relay
380
Chapter 38 PoE Commands
PoE (Power over Ethernet) technology describes a system to transmit electrical power along
with data to remote devices over standard twisted-pair cable in an Ethernet network. It is
especially useful for supplying power to IP telephones, wireless LAN access points, cameras
and so on.
A time-range based PoE enables you to implement PoE power supply by differentiating the
time-ranges.
38.1 power inline consumption (global)
Description
The power inline consumption command is used to configure the max
power the PoE switch can supply globally.
Syntax
power inline consumption
power-limit
Parameter
power-limit
——The max power the PoE switch can supply. It ranges from 1 to
116W.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the max power the PoE switch can supply as 100W:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# power inline consumption 100
38.2 power profile
Description
The power profile command is used to create a PoE profile for the switch. To
delete the configured PoE profile configuration, please use no power profile
command. PoE Profile is a short cut for the configuration of the PoE port. In a
381
PoE profile, the PoE status, PoE priority and power limit are configured. You
can specify a PoE profile for each PoE port individually.
Syntax
power profile
name
[ supply { enable | disable } [ priority { low | middle | high }
[ consumption {
power-limit
| auto | class1 | class2 | class3 | class4 } ] ] ]
no power profile
name
Parameter
name
—— The PoE profile name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. If the name
being assigned contains spaces then put it inside double quotes.
supply —— The PoE status of the port in the profile. By default, the PoE
status is “enable”.
priority —— The PoE priority of the port in the profile. The priority levels
include “high”, “middle” and “low” in descending order. When the supply
power exceeds the system power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower
priority will be disconnected. By default, the PoE priority is “low”.
consumption
—— The max power the port in the profile can supply. There are
six options: “power-limit”, “auto”, ”class1”, “class2”, “class3” and “class4”.
“power-limit” indicates you can manually enter a value. It ranges from 1 to 300.
The value is in the unit of 0.1 watt. For instance, if you want to configure the
max power as 5w, you should enter 50. “auto” indicates the value is assigned
automatically by the PoE switch. “class1” represents 4w. “class2” represents
7w. “class3” represents 15.4w. “class4” represents 30w.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a PoE profile named “IP Camera” whose PoE status is “enable”, PoE
priority is “low” and the power limit is “5w”:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# power profile “IP Camera” supply enable
priority low consumption 50
382
38.3 power time-range
Description
The power time-range command is used to create PoE time-range for the
switch and enter Power Time-range Configuration Mode. After a PoE
time-range is created, you need to specify the date and time which has three
mode options: absolute, periodic and holiday. A PoE time-range is the
intersection of absolute time-range and periodic time-range with holiday
included or excluded. To delete the corresponding PoE time-range
configuration, please use no power time-range command. The PoE
time-range determines the power supply time of the switch. You can specify a
PoE time-range for each PoE port individually.
Syntax
power time-range
name
no power time-range
name
Parameter
name
—— The PoE time-range name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a PoE time-range named “tRange1” for the switch:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# power time-range tRange1
38.4 absolute
Description
The absolute command is used to create an absolute mode time-range for
the Time-range of the switch. The Time-range takes affect only when both
Absolute Time and Periodic Time are in effect.
Repeat this command to create multiple absolute time-ranges. Up to 7
absolute time-ranges can be created in one Time-range, and their union is the
Absolute Time-range.
383
If no absolute time range is configured, the absolute time range takes effect
from January 1, 2000 00:00 to December 31, 2099 24:00.
To delete the corresponding absolute time-range, please use no absolute
command.
Syntax
absolute from
start-date
to
end-date
no absolute [
index
]
Parameter
start-date
—— The start date in Absolute Mode, in the format of
MM/DD/YYYY-HH:MM.
end-date
—— The end date in Absolute Mode, in the format of
MM/DD/YYYY-HH:MM.
index —— Specify the index of the absolute time-range to delete. If not
specified, all absolute time-ranges will be deleted.
Command Mode
Power Time-range Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create an absolute mode time-range for the PoE of the switch and specify
the date extending from 08:00 on May 5th, 2012 to 22:00 on Oct. 5th, 2012:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# power time-range tRange1
T2500G-10MPS(config-time-range)# absolute from 05/05/2012-08:00 to
10/05/2012-22:00
38.5 periodic
Description
The periodic command is used to create a periodic mode time-range for the
PoE time-range of the switch. The periodic time-range reccurs every week.
The Time-range takes affect only when both Absolute Time and Periodic
Time are in effect.
384
Repeat this command to create multiple periodic time-ranges. Up to 7
periodic time-ranges can be created in one Time-range, and their union is the
Periodic Time-range.
If no periodic time range is configured, the periodic time range takes effect all
the time from Monday to Sunday.
To delete the corresponding periodic mode time-range configuration, please
use no periodic command.
Syntax
periodic start
start-time
end
end-time
day-of-the-week
day-of-the-week
no periodic [
index
]
Parameter
start-date
—— The start time in the day in periodic mode, in the format of
HH:MM.
end-date
—— The end time in the day in periodic mode, in the format of
HH:MM.
day-of-the-week
—— Specify the days included in a week, ranging from 1-7,
in the format as 1,3-4.
index —— Specify the index of the periodic time-range to delete. If not
specified, all periodic time-ranges will be deleted.
Command Mode
Power Time-range Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the Time-range named “tRange2” with two periodic time-ranges:
one is from 08:00 to 18:00 during Monday to Friday, the other is from 10:00 to
16:00 during the weekends:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# power time-range tRange2
T2500G-10MPS(config-time-range)# periodic start 08:00 end 18:00
day-of-the-week 1-5
T2500G-10MPS(config-time-range)# periodic start 10:00 end 16:00
day-of-the-week 6-7
385
38.6 power holiday
Description
The power holiday command is used to create PoE holiday for the switch. To
delete the corresponding PoE holiday configuration, please use no power
holiday command.
Syntax
power holiday
name
start-date
start-date
end-date
end-date
no power holiday
name
Parameter
name
—— The PoE holiday name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.
start-date
—— The start date of the PoE holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for
instance, 05/01.
end-date
——The end date of the PoE holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for
instance, 05/03.
Command Mode
Global Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a PoE holiday named “LaborDay”, and configure the start date as
October 1st and the end date as October 3rd:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# power holiday LaborDay start-date 05/01
end-date 05/03
38.7 holiday
Description
The holiday command is used to configure holiday mode for the Time-range
of the switch. The holiday will be excluded from the Time-range you created if
the Holiday mode is Exclude.
Syntax
holiday { exclude | include }
386
Parameter
exclude
——The final Time range will be the intersection of the Absolute Time
and the Periodic Time, with Holiday excluded.
include
—— The Holiday has no effect on the Time-range, which means the
final Time-range will be the intersection of the Absolute Time and Periodic
Time.
Command Mode
Power Time-range Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Create a holiday mode time-range for the PoE time-range named “tRange3”
and configure PoE time-range of the switch excludes the PoE holiday:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# power time-range tRange3
T2500G-10MPS(config-time-range)# holiday exclude
38.8 power inline consumption (interface)
Description
The power inline consumption command is used to configure the power limit
the corresponding port can supply.
Syntax
power inline consumption {
power-limit
| auto | class1 | class2 | class3 | class4 }
Parameter
consumption
—— The max power the port in the profile can supply. There are
six options: “power-limit”, “auto”, ”class1”, “class2”, “class3” and “class4”.
“power-limit” indicates you can manually enter a value. It ranges from 1 to 300.
The value is in the unit of 0.1 watt. For instance, if you want to configure the
max power as 5w, you should enter 50. “auto” indicates the value is assigned
automatically by the PoE switch. “class1” represents 4w. “class2” represents
7w. “class3” represents 15.4w. “class4” represents 30w.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
387
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the power limit as “5w” for port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# power inline consumption 50
38.9 power inline priority
Description
The power inline priority command is used to configure the PoE priority for
the corresponding port
Syntax
power inline priority { low | middle | high }
Parameter
priority ——The PoE priority of the port. The priority levels include “high”,
“middle” and “low” in descending order. When the supply power exceeds the
system power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be
disconnected. By default, the priority level is “low”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Configure the PoE priority as “low” for port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# power inline priority low
388
38.10 power inline supply
Description
The power inline supply command is used to configure the PoE status of the
corresponding port.
Syntax
power inline supply { enable | disable }
Parameter
enable | disable —— The PoE status of the port. By default, the PoE status is
“enable”.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Enable the PoE feature for port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# power inline supply enable
38.11 power inline profile
Description
The power inline profile command is used to bind a PoE profile to the
corresponding port. To cancel the bind relation, please use no power inline
profile command.
Syntax
power inline profile
name
no power inline profile
Parameter
name
—— The name of the PoE profile to be bound to the port. If the name
being assigned contains spaces then put it inside double quotes.
389
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range
gigabitEthernet)
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind the PoE profile named “IP Camera” to port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# power inline profile “IP Camera”
38.12 power inline time-range
Description
The power inline time-range command is used to bind a PoE time-range to
the corresponding port. To cancel the bind relation, please use no power
inline time-range command.
Syntax
power inline time-range
name
no power inline time-range
Parameter
name
—— The name of the PoE time-range to be bound to the port.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these
commands.
Example
Bind the PoE time-range named “tRange2" to port 1/0/2:
T2500G-10MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2
T2500G-10MPS(config-if)# power inline time-range tRange2
390
38.13 show power inline
Description
The show power inline command is used to display the global PoE
information of the system.
Syntax
show power inline
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the PoE information of the system:
T2500G-10MPS# show power inline
38.14 show power inline configuration interface
Description
The show power inline configuration interface command is used to display
the PoE configuration of the certain port.
Syntax
show power inline configuration interface [ gigabitEthernet
port
]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the PoE configuration of all ports:
T2500G-10MPS# show power inline configuration interface
391
38.15 show power inline information interface
Description
The show power inline information command is used to display the PoE
information of the certain port.
Syntax
show power inline information interface [ gigabitEthernet port ]
Parameter
port
—— The Ethernet port number.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the PoE information of all ports:
T2500G-10MPS# show power inline information interface
38.16 show power profile
Description
The show power profile command is used to display the defined PoE profile.
Syntax
show power profile
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the defined PoE profile:
T2500G-10MPS# show power profile
392
38.17 show power holiday
Description
The show power holiday command is used to display the defined PoE
holiday.
Syntax
show power holiday
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the defined PoE holiday:
T2500G-10MPS# show power holiday
38.18 show power time-range
Description
The show power time-range command is used to display the configuration
of PoE time-range.
Syntax
show power time-range [
name
]
Parameter
name
—— The PoE time-range name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. All
PoE time-range configurations will be displayed if not specified.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode
Privilege Requirement
None.
Example
Display the configuration of PoE time-range:
T2500G-10MPS# show power time-range
393